SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 1

RING-MASTER INTERCOM SYSTEMS

CB901-1/-2/-3/-M

SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

This manual covers information on the SVT (Service Terminal) programming format for the CB901
Processor Card NFE1683.

CB901-1 SINGLE STAGE SYSTEM; 240 SUBSCRIBERS

CB901-2 DOUBLE STAGE SYSTEM; 480 SUBSCRIBERS

CB901-3 TRIPLE STAGE SYSTEM; 717 SUBSCRIBERS

CB901-M MULTI STAGE SYSTEM; MORE THAN 717 SUBSCR, UP TO 7170.

Edition, SEPT 1997. Software TX 5.7.

STENTO ASA reserves the right to change the products and their specifications, as well as the information in
this publication, at any time without notice. The information is believed to be accurate and reliable, but not
warranted to be true in all cases.

WWT-04E

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
2 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION §1 PAGE 5

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY INDICATIONS §4 PAGE 13

A ALL CALL §28 PAGE 84

C CALENDAR (DATE/TIME) §46 PAGE 134

CALL FORWARD §32 PAGE 94
CALL LAST CALLERS §42 PAGE 129
CALL NUMBER DATA (ALL) §40 PAGE 127
CALL NUMBER WITH PAGING DATA §19 PAGE 55
CALL NUMBER WITHOUT PAGING DATA §18 PAGE 52
CALL NUMBER, DEVICE TYPE §20 PAGE 67
CALL NUMBER, PRIVILEGE TYPE §21 PAGE 68
CALL TRANSFER §34 PAGE 98
CB 901 FEATURE PROGRAM §11 PAGE 32
CENTRAL ANSWERING SERVICE (CAS) §35 PAGE 99
CONFERENCE §31 PAGE 93
CONFIGURATION OF PROCOM PLUS/BACKUP OF DATA §65 PAGE 199

D DATA TRANSMISSION §23 PAGE 72

DEFINITION AND CONFIGURATION OF COMMUNICATION
PORTS §54 PAGE 148
DIRECT ACCESS STATIONS §25 PAGE 76
DIRECT CONFERENCE DIALLING §45 PAGE 132
DIRECT DIALLING §26 PAGE 78
DISPLAY STATION FEATURES §60 PAGE 169
Feature text language PAGE 169
Caller identification. PAGE 173
Relay function (door opener) PAGE 173
Message display PAGE 177
Display additional data PAGE 178
DOUBLE STAGE SYSTEM CB 901-2 §13 PAGE 35
DUMMY NUMBER (WITH AUTO-PAGING) MULTIPLE CALL
NUMBERS §38 PAGE 124

F FEATURE ACCESS/FEATURE CODES/FEATURE COUNTER §17 PAGE 45

Feature Codes PAGE 45
Feature Access PAGE 47
Feature Counter PAGE 48
FEATURE LISTING $11 PAGE 32
FREE SEATING $61 PAGE 179

G GROUP CALL §29 PAGE 87

Selective Group Call PAGE 91

H HELP COMMANDS §8 PAGE 23

HUNT §30 PAGE 92

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 3

I INSTALLATION / TERMINATION OF COMMUNICATION

PORTS §53 PAGE 145
INTER STAGE COMMUNICATION §52 PAGE 144
INTERSYSTEM TIE-LINE §56 PAGE 151

L LAST NUMBER REDIAL §41 PAGE 128

LED INDICATORS §3 PAGE 12
LINE MONITORING §43 PAGE 130
LIST AND GET COMMANDS §10 PAGE 27

M MULTI STAGE SYSTEM CB 903-MULTI §15 PAGE 41

N NUMBERING/CALL DIGIT §16 PAGE 43

O OPEN STATION §55 PAGE 150

P PARAMETER SYNTAX §7 PAGE 20

PRINTER OUTPUT §50 PAGE 142
PRIORITY §27 PAGE 83
PRIVACY §22 PAGE 70
PROGRAMME CHANNELS §59 PAGE 157
Programme distribution channels PAGE 159
Programme distribution Group Call Channel PAGE 163
Local programme distribution Group Call Channel PAGE 165
Programme distribution Information Channel PAGE 166
Forced programme distribution. PAGE 168
PROGRAMMING START-UP PROCEDURE §6 PAGE 18

R REMOTE CONTROL §58 PAGE 156

REMOTE DIALLING §57 PAGE 154
RESET, PASSWORD, LOG OUT COMMANDS §49 PAGE 141

S SECRETARY TRANSFER §33 PAGE 97

SECTORING §37 PAGE 118
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE COMMANDS §36 PAGE 115
Programming call numbers from any master station PAGE 115
Programme call numbers from a single master station PAGE 115
Identifying a call number by use of 7-segment display PAGE 116
Identifying a call number by use of display in a display master station PAGE 117
Direct Unit Call PAGE 117
SET COMMANDS §9 PAGE 24
SILENT REQUEST $62 PAGE 180
SINGLE STAGE SYSTEM CB 901 §12 PAGE 34
SOFTWARE VERSION §48 PAGE 140
SPEED CALL/SPEED GROUP PHONE BOOK §24 PAGE 73
STATUS I/O SPECIFICATIONS §63 PAGE 181
SWAP CALL NUMBER §44 PAGE 131
SWITCH SETTINGS FOR PROGRAMMING AND TESTING §2 PAGE 7
SYSTEM (CUSTOMER) NAME §51 PAGE 143

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
4 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

T TERMINAL SET-UP/COMMUNICATION PORT CONFIG. §5 PAGE 15

TIMERS, SYSTEM WIDE TIMERS, CAS TIMERS, SUBSCRIBER
TIMERS $47 PAGE 135
1. System wide timers PAGE 135
2. CAS timers PAGE 136
3. Subscriber timers PAGE 137
4. System parameters PAGE 138
5. Subscriber parameters PAGE 139
TRACE ROUTINES §64 PAGE 196
TRIPLE STAGE SYSTEM CB 901-3 §14 PAGE 38

V VISICALL FEATURES §39 PAGE 125

Caller Identification PAGE 125
Message display PAGE 126

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 5

1. INTRODUCTION.
This document is a guide to programming the Ring-Master system CB901(-1,-2,-3,-M) equipped with
the new processor card, NFE1683 in the Basic Card-set DP952E.

Programming of the previous generation, DP952D is not covered by this document (see Tricon 3
programming manual).
Programming of the CB901 central is accomplished by:

1. Switches on the Processor Card NFE1683.

2. Switches on the Timing Control Card NFE1606.
3. Service terminal commands (SVT).
4. Master station keypad programming.

If standard features and number series are required only, then a service terminal is not needed.
Programming of individual call numbers can be carried out using a master station, thus eliminating
the need of a service terminal to program the number series.

The Basic Card set, DP952E, is the successor to the card set DP952D. The more powerful processor
card, NFE1683 combines the functions of the processor card, programming card and data link card(s)
in one card. Hence, the Basic Card set DP952E now consists of the following cards:

NFE1683 Processor Card

NFE1606 Timing Control Card
NFE1519 Switch Control Card
NFE1607 Audio Control Card
NFE1521 Link Control Card (x2)
NFE1528 Power Card

The motherboard, NFE1523 Rev-A must be used, (DP979/DP990).

Switch setting on the Timing Control Card NFE 1606 are not compatible.

Standard intercom features and transmission speed (baud rate) between slaves are now programmed
by the service terminal (previously used switches).

NOTE: In order to operate with the Display Station AA960 (or other type of display stations) the CPU
card NFE1683 and the Motherboards NFE1523A and NFE1524A must be modified according to
information in the Conversion Instructions DP994.

You could attach a Terminal, PC (IBM compatible) or Silent 700 to the service terminal port. We
recommend use of a terminal or PC as higher transmission speeds and cursor keys are available.

Please see chapter 5 for terminal set-up and communication port configuration.

When operating on speed higher than 300 baud a "Welcome Picture" is displayed when logged in.
Important information to read is:
- the soft/hardware version
- system type programmed (single, double, triple or multi)
- stage no.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
6 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

*******************************************************************
** **
** RING - MASTER **
** **
** (c) Copyright 1997 STENTO ASA **
** P.O. Box 68, Leirdal **
** N-1008 Oslo, Norway **
** **
** H/W Version : 3 **
** S/W Version : TX5.7 **
** **
** System type : CB901-1 **
** System name : No name .. **
** Stage : 1 **
** **
** Date : Mon 15-SEPT-97 07:19:46.24 **
** **
*******************************************************************

When operating on 300 baud (Silent 700), just the program version is printed. This is to save time,
due to the slow printing speed on 300 baud. It is very important to follow the start-up sequence
properly, if not, the system will not function and will require complete reprogramming.

You should configure the system in the following order:

1. Set switches on Processor Card(s). Remember to reset the system

2. Set switches on Timing Control Card(s).
3. Remember to reset the system to default values.
4. Attach Service Terminal to any stage.
5. Power up all stages.
6. Follow test and adjustment in the Installation Manual
7. Login to the SVT program, type "ESC" + password.
8. Program the features.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 7

2. SWITCH-SETTING FOR PROGRAMMING AND TESTING.

Before powering up the central, all programming dip switches must be set in the correct positions. The
switches are located on the Processor card NFE1683, the Timing Control card NFE1606 and the
Subscriber card NFE1813 (display subscriber card).

PROCESSOR CARD NFE1683:

Switch group U49

Switches no. 1-3 determine the Service Terminal baud rate. These switches are read at
reset/power-up ONLY. To change the baud rate during operation use the STTY command.

Switch number: Function

1 2 3 Service Terminal BAUD Rate

OFF OFF OFF 300 (T.I. Silent 700)

ON OFF OFF 600
OFF ON OFF 1200
ON ON OFF 2400
OFF OFF ON 4800 (Recommended for AMSTRAD 640/512)
ON OFF ON 9600 (Recommended for IBM)
OFF ON ON 19200
ON ON ON 19200

Switch no. 4 is used to select Automatic Updating of the display info in display stations (AA960)
including the Line Monitoring and Station Alive test of these stations.
Switch OFF. Update data to each station every 5 min. (updating of display information
(clock/time, caller NO caller ID), line monitoring and station status (privacy, call forward etc.)
Switch ON. No auto-updating. Updating must be done manually by dialling feature code from
the station (default feature code is 939).
Switches no. 5 and 6 are not in use.
Switches no. 7 and 8 determine the booting options and are monitored every 0.25 seconds to update
the 7-segment LED display accordingly.
The switch setting on switch group U49, NFE 1683, can be listed by the SVT command LSS.
Also see chapter 5, TERMINAL SET-UP for SVT programming of baud rate. This is used if the baud
rate is to be changed during the programming sequence.

Switch number LED Boot option

7 8

OFF OFF Blank Boot from battery RAM

See traffic measurement

ON OFF "S" Enable programming of call number from any station

OFF ON ** "d" Overwrite battery RAM with standard number series

from EPROM.(i.e. first time boot).

ON ON "F" Same as "d" above. In future release will boot "factory

settings" (no number series at all)

** Note. To give the user warning, the 7-segment LED on the CPU card counts "d", "9", "d", "8",
....."d", "0", "d" (10 seconds). At any time during the count down sequence the user can reposition
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
8 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

switch no. 8 (and 7 if necessary) and the battery RAM is not cleared. If the display counts down to "0",
the default program will be loaded into the RAM, and all customer programmed configuration/
features will be lost. The display will continue flashing "d" until switch no. 8 is set in position OFF.

TIMING CONTROL CARD NFE1606:

This card is next to the CPU card, and there are 2 sets of switches (U19 and U25) on this card.

Switch group U19,

This switch group determines the stage number (1-30) and number of digits in the call number (2-6).

Switch number Stage:

1 2 3 4 5

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1

OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 2
ON ON OFF OFF OFF 3
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 4
ON OFF ON OFF OFF 5
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
OFF ON ON ON ON 30
ON ON ON ON ON 31

Switch number Digits in call number

6 7 8

OFF ON OFF 2
ON ON OFF 3
OFF OFF ON 4
ON OFF ON 5
OFF ON ON 6

Switch setting of switch group U19, NFE1606, can be listed by the SVT command LSS.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 9

Switch group U25:

Switches 1 and 2 define the system type (size). Switches 3-8 are reserved for future use, set all these
to OFF.

Switch number System type

1 2

OFF OFF Single (CB 901-1)

ON OFF Double (CB 901-2)
OFF ON Triple (CB 901-3)
ON ON Multi (CB 901-M, 4-30)

Switch setting of switch group U25, NFE 1606, can be listed by the SVT command LSS.

SVT > lss

NFE1683 U49 NFE1606 U19 NFE1606 U25
Stage 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
===========================================================================
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SVT >

SUBSCRIBER CARD NFE1813:

The switch package SW902 contains 4 switches which is used for control of the signal to the display
stations (AA960 etc.).
Switch 1 controls the handshaking between the stations and the Subscriber Card NFE1813. To set the
switch to position ON, enables the ACKnowledge signal. This position is used to ensure proper
communication and must be used if there is electrical interference signals present that can influence
on distribution of the 32 kHz signalling.
Turning the ACK signal switch OFF will increase the updating speed for the display, and this position
will normally work satisfactory. This is the normal operation position.
Switch 2, 3 and 4 are used to address the different 8 subscribers on the subscriber card. An Envelope
signal, for the selected subscriber position, that can be used as an external trigger signal for an
oscilloscope, will be present at the test point ENVELOPE.
See the Technical Manual System CB901 for details.

The SVT command LSCV - List Subscriber Card Version can be used to list the software version and
the hardware revision letter for the different subscriber cards in the system.

SVT > lscv

Subscriber Card <1,-,30/*> : 1
Stage <1,-,n/*> : 1
Card Stage S/W Version Rel. Date H/W Rev. Letter
======================================================
1 1 SC2.1 7 Apr 1995 A (00000)

The command SSCACC - Set Subscriber Card ACK Counter Clear is used to clear/reset the data in
the ACK counter. This counter indicates how many handshaking ACK signals that has failed
transmission. Switch SW902,1 must be set ON.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
10 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SVT > sscacc

Subscriber Card <1,-,30/*> : 1
Stage <1,-,n/*> : 1

The command LSCAC - List Subscriber Card ACK Counter is used to list the data in the ACK counter.
This counter contains information of the failed handshaking ACK transmission signals between the
Subscriber Card NFE1813 and the Display Station.
If the ACK is OK, then the counter will not increment.

SVT > lscac

Subscriber Card <1,-,30/*> : 1
Stage <1,-,n/*> : 1
Card Stage Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8
===========================================================================
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

The command SSCMCC - Set Subscriber Card Message Counter Clear is used to clear/reset the data
in the Message counter. This counter indicates how many messages that are sent from the Processor
Subscriber Card NFE1813 to each of the Display Stations.

SVT > sscmcc

Subscriber Card <1,-,30/*> : 1
Stage <1,-,n/*> : 1

The command LSCMC - List Subscriber Card Message Counter is used to list how many messages
are totally sent from the Subscriber Card NFE1813 to the Display Stations.

SVT > lscmc

Subscriber Card <1,-,30/*> : 1
Stage <1,-,n/*> : 1
Card Stage Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 8
===========================================================================
1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
SVT >

The command LSCRT - List Subscriber Card Run Ticks is used to list the counting since last reset on
the Subscriber Card NFE1813. Low value indicates regularely resets and a possible failure.

SVT > lscrt

Subscriber Card <1,-,30/*> : 1
Stage <1,-,n/*> : 1
Card Stage Years Days Hrs. Min. Sec. Ticks a 983 uS
==========================================================
1 1 0 0 0 13 26 $00000c9a0c
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 11

The command LSCST - List Subscriber Card Switch and Test-points is to list the switch settings for
the Switch SW902 and statuses for test-points TP6 to TP11.

SVT > lscst

Subscriber Card(s) <1,-,30/*> : 1,2
Stage <1, -n/*> : 1
Card Stage ACK Unit H/W Rev. Letter TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP10 TP11
=======================================================================
1 1 Off 1 A (00000) 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 On 5 A (00000) 1 1 1 1 1 1
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
12 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

3. LED INDICATORS.
There are 3 LEDs and one 7-segment display on the front of the CPU card NFE 1683.

LED no. 1 indicates whether the CPU has halted (off), or is running (on).

LED no. 2 indicates whether the CPU is in user (on), or supervisor mode (off). It lights when the
program is processing external events such as pressing a button, processing service terminal
commands. It remains off when there is no traffic.

LED no. 3 indicates status of the watchdog trigger. It blinks at 2 Hz under normal operation. It is
triggered by the software, hence if it stops blinking then the software has hung.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 13

4. 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY INDICATIONS.

The display meaning depends on one of the following 4 status:

1. SELF-TEST.
At system restart the display indicates self-test functions which are carried out at every
restart.
"1" - PROM checksum test
"2" - RAM 0 test
"3" - RAM 1 test
If any of the above tests fail then "9" is displayed on the 7-segment display and
an attempt is made to display more information on the service terminal.

RAM FAIL Unn ADDRESS nnnnnnn COUNT nnnn BITS nnnn

or
PROM CSUM CALC nnnn BURNT nnnn

2. LOAD STANDARD PROGRAM.

After the self-test, with switch 8 in ON position, the display counts down "d", "9", "d",...."0"
as a warning that the battery ram will be cleared (after the "0").

3. SWITCH INDICATOR.
After restart with switch 7, 8 in any other position than OFF, flashes "d", "s" or "f" as
defined on page 7.

4. SERIAL TRAFFIC INDICATOR.

After restart, with switches 7, 8 in OFF position each segment is used as an indication of
traffic on each of the 6 serial ports. Each time a message is sent or received the
corresponding segment is flashing.

6 2
7

5 3
4

1 - INTERSTAGE 1 - implemented
2 - INTERSTAGE 2 - implemented
3 - DSP - implemented
4 - PAGER - implemented
5 - SVT - led segment not implemented
6 - PRINTER - port and led segment not implemented

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
14 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

5. If one of the following 68000 exceptions occurs the "." (DP above) will be lighted and a
number indicating which of the exceptions has occurred as follows:
"P." Power failure "5." Privilege violation
"0." Bus error "6." Spurious interrupt
"1." Address error "7." Un-initialised interrupt
"2." Illegal instruction "8." Unexpected interrupt
"3." Divide by 0
"4." CHK instruction,
TRAPV instruction
Trace,
Line 1010 emulation
Line 1111 emulation

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 15

5. TERMINAL SET-UP/COMMUNICATION PORT CONFIGURATION

6 different ports are available for communication to the following devices: Service Terminal (SVT),
printer, svim, pocket pager, external computer and 2 data ports for communication to
Double/Triple/Multi Stage Systems (CB901-2, CB901-3 and CB901-M).

Different terminal types can be used for programming the CPU Card NFE1683, but it is strongly
recommended to use a Personal Computer (PC), IBM compatible.

Terminal types:

1. Texas Instrument Silent 700 series (or equivalent).

Some of these terminals have paper print-out facility. They operate on 300 baud, and is
often used with Tricon 3 programming.

2. Ampex 230 Video Display Terminal.

Can be used on different baud rate. Used with the Ring-Master SVIM system.

3. Personal Computer - PC.

A PC can be used with a communication software package operating in Terminal Emulation
mode. This permits you to run full-screen mainframe applications using your PC as a remote
terminal.

By using a PC, with the right communications software package, you can take backup of all data
(system and individual subscriber data) in the system and save it on a diskette.

WARNING. Do not connect the Video Display Unit or PC to AC earth ground. This can damage
the NFE 1683 card or the terminal due to different voltage termination’s with reference to
ground. Remove the ground reference in the terminal cable/plug.
If the ground cannot be removed due to security regulations, then a short haul modem should
be used as insulation between the terminal and the NFE 1683 card.

Most of the communication software on the marked can emulate video display terminals. We have
tested the SVT program with different communication programs and found that the PROCOMM PLUS
manufactured by DataStorm Technologies INC. in Missouri, U.S.A. is very suitable and easy to use.
Procomm Plus (PCPLUS) is available in most countries.
Among the PCPLUS features the following can be implemented with SVT:

1. Terminal Emulation.
SVT programming.

2. Modem operation.
Allows remote access (via modems and public telephone lines) to a CPU card NFE 1683 for
feature programming and system analysis.

3. System backup.
Downloading and uploading of files. "Downloading" a file means receive data from the Ring-
Master CPU. This data can be saved on a diskette. Sending a data file from the PC to the
CPU card is called "Uploading". This data (the system parameters/features) can be
edited/created on the PC with a word processor.

4. Host mode.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
16 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

PCPLUS allows remote access to another remote PC for file transfer, electronic mail, DOS
access, remote program execution and more. These features can be very useful for
updating of Ring-Master software at our distributors remote sites.
Please see Appendix A in this manual how to install, set-up and configure PCPLUS, to
operate with SVT. Appendix A also includes system BACKUP.

A. TRANSMISSION SPEED (BAUD RATE) AND PARAMETERS.

1. Service Terminal set-up (SVT).

Depending of the terminal used, the correct baud rate must be programmed by switch group U49 on
the CPU card NFE 1683,switches 1-3. These switches are read at reset/power-up only.

Switch number: Function

1 2 3 Service Terminal Baud Rate

OFF OFF OFF 300 (T.I. Silent 700)

ON OFF OFF 600
OFF ON OFF 1200
ON ON OFF 2400
OFF OFF ON 4800 (Recommended for AMSTRAD 640/512)
ON OFF ON 9600 (Recommended rate IBM)
OFF ON ON 19200

To change the baud rate during operation use the STTY command. The existing status can be listed
by LTTY.

Type T for service terminal (svT). The Silent 700 will operate on 300 baud. The service terminal does
not distinguish between upper and lower case command names "STTY" is the same as "stty".

To change the baud rate, and enter the other transmission parameters, use the command STTY. The
transmission parameters is normally set to: Bits per Character: 8, Parity: None, Stop Bits: 1 (Bit 8 = 0,
No parity check).

To use an Ampex 230 terminal or PC for programming, the baud rate should be changed to a higher
speed, for example 9600:

SVT > stty

Driver <sVim/Pager/pC/Dsp/Etp/svT/pRinter> : t
Terminal Type <Generic/Vt100/Ampex230/Wyse50/Silent700> : a
Baud Rate <110/300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200> : 9600
Bits per Character <7..8> : 8
Parity <None/Odd/Even> : n
Stop Bits <1..2> : 1
SVT >

2. Set-up of other communication ports.

The SVIM port requires the following transmission parameters:

baud rate: 9600, bits per character: 8, Parity: none, Stop bits: 1.
The default port is no.3

The PAGER port requires the following transmission parameters (for Scanpager):

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 17

baud rate: 4800, bits per character: 7, Parity: even, Stop bits: 1.
The default port is no.4

To define the functions of the different port, use the SD (set driver) command, (see §56 in this
manual). Use the STTY (set serial port characteristics) to configure the transmission characteristics
for the different ports.

B. INTERFACE CABLE CONFIGURATION:

The interface cable to SVT can either be connected to the 9-pin connector in the front of the cpu card
NFE1683 or at the rear of the motherboard NFE1523A, card position 19, (XA2, cpu's card position),
plug P2 pin 25, 26 and 27. Use a subscriber cable BF 925 for termination. See Installation Chapter in
this manual. The cable termination should be:

9-pin plug, On motherboard, Signal:

in front of NFE1683: rear

2 26a RX
3 25a TX
4 25b DTR (+5V)
5 26b Signal ground (-5V)

TERMINATION OF INTERFACE CABLE FOR SILENT 703, 743, AMPEX 230

AND PC (IBM COMP).

NFE 1683 Silent 703 Silent 743 Ampex 230 PC IBM comp PC IBM comp.
9-pin plug 25-pin plug 15-pin plug 25-pin plug 9-pin plug 25-pin plug

2 - 2 13 2 3 2
3 - 3 12 3 2 3
4 - 11 6
5 - 7 1 7 5 7
7 - 20
Short (short 4-5)*
6-20 (short 6-20)*
* = if required

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
18 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

6. PROGRAMMING START-UP PROCEDURE.

When pressing the reset switch SW9, the terminal will print:

"RING-MASTER SERVICE TERMINAL"

Press the ESC key on the terminal. The terminal will then ask for a password.

3 access levels are provided for security. For each access level there is a password.

1. SERVICE level.
These are the most commonly used commands you will need. When you log-in with the service
password, you have access to all service commands. The standard service password is "tridex".

2. SYSTEM level.
When you log-in with the system password, you have access to all service + system commands. At
system level you can change the access of any service command to system level. You can also
change the service password (SUP command).This mode shall only be entered in co-operation with
the Ring Master software lab for trouble shooting.
The system password may be obtained upon request from Ring-Master A/S.

3. SUPER USER
When you log-in with the super password, you have access to all service + system + super
commands. At system level you can change the access of any command to any level. Super
commands give access to powerful software debugging tools intended for Ring-Master A/S personnel
only.

Wrong use of mode 2 and 3 may cause System Crash. The processor will then be initiated by loading
in the standard program. All customer programmed data will be lost, and the cpu card must be
reprogrammed using the SVT.
When the system is ready for programming the following prompt is present on the screen/terminal:

SVT>

Use the command SSPM to enable stage indication in the SVT prompt.

SVT > ( The digit ‘ 1 ‘ is to inform you, to which stage in a multistage system you are connected. )

Whenever this prompt is present you can type "help, h or ?" for help. A help menu will then be
displayed. Typing "hl" will give a list of available list and get commands Typing "hs" will give a list of
available set commands.

A command line can be edited at any time:

1. left-arrow : move cursor left one character
2. right-arrow: move cursor right one character
3. delete : delete character to left of cursor
4. ctrl-e : insert one character at cursor
5. ctrl-x : delete the command line
6. return : execute the command line

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 19

Two different formats for the commands are available:

1: The IN-LINE format

This format permits the command and data to be typed on the same line. This format should be used
when programming from a printing terminal,- to save time. This format MUST be used when pre-
programming and saving customer data on a diskette, using a communication program with a PC.
We recommend to use the PROCOMM PLUS,- please see chapter 65 in this manual.

2: The PARAMETER PROMPTING format

This format is recommended to be used when programming from a video display terminal. An
explanatory text is printed to give format information for each data to be entered.

Most of the programming examples in this manual will be illustrated in the PARAMETER
PROMPTING format. If IN-LINE format is used, this will be indicated.

When the terminal programming is completed, type "Log" when the prompt SVT> is present. The
cpu's terminal RS232 port is now closed and can only be activated again by typing one of the 3
password ("tridex" is the standard password).

Each call number in the system is given its own complete status table.

Each stage in the system has the capacity to register/store 255 call numbers.

Example:
Stage no. 1 has the standard number series range from 100-339 in a 3 digit dialling system. The first
subscriber position (line equipment number) in the central, 00, is given call number 100. The next
position, 01, is given number 101, and so on. When we are changing a position's call number (a
position is given a new call number) the originally (old) number will automatically be removed. Only
one call number can be programmed to a position number.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
20 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

7. PARAMETER SYNTAX

A. Parameter Prompting.
A command can be entered with parameters all on one line or you can simply type the command,
then "RETURN". You will always be prompted for missing parameters automatically.

The following examples all give the same result:

SVT > SCN
Call Number <1000,-,9999> : 2340,2360-2380
Start at Line Equipment <$0..$fe> : 0
Stage <1..32> : 1
SVT >
or
SVT > SCN 2340,2360-2380
Start at Line Equipment <$0..$fe> : 0
Stage <1..32> : 1
SVT >
or
SVT > SCN 2340,2360-2380 0
Stage <1..32> : 1
SVT >
or
SVT > SCN 2340,2360-2380 0 1
SVT >

B. Prompt Syntax.

The periods ".." indicates that only ONE value in the lower/upper range can be entered. You cannot
enter a list or range of values.

The "$" indicates that the value entered will be interpreted as hexadecimal. This is most useful for
entering line equipment positions.

The "-" indicates that a range of values may be entered, starting with lower, ending with upper, and
separated by a minus sign

The "," indicates that a list of parameters (in the indicated range) separated by commas may be
entered.

A combination of "-" and "," means that a combination of lists and ranges may be entered (as in the
above example).

A "*" is the wildcard character. This means all data items. For example, LLE * 1 means list a line
equipment positions (00-ff) in stage 1.
A "U" can be entered for some commands to undefine a parameter, and "D" to set a default value.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 21

C. Error Handling.

The service terminal detects errors in command input and gives a meaningful error message. The
error messages are customised for each command. The following errors are detected:

1. Misspelt commands.

SVT > sdk 1000 v

???

2. Parameter range errors.

When a parameter range error is detected, you will be prompted for the parameter again.
SVT > spt 1000 f
ERROR : Privilege Type <1,-,22/*/N> : 4
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

3. Parameter type errors.

SVT > spt 1000 ac
ERROR : Privilege Type <1,-,22/*/N> :

NOTE: ac = pre - TX4.5 and post TX3.3

4. Missing parameters.

You can abort a command by simply typing "RETURN" at any prompt level. If the command is
aborted, the data is not set.
SVT > spt 1000
Privilege Type <1,-,22/*/N> :
SVT >

5. Logical errors in programming.

Where possible, the SVT detect logical errors in programming. For example, try to define a call
number with a number which is already defined as an all call number:
SVT > sacn 4000 0
SVT > scn 4000 1 0
ERROR : Number 4000 already exists as All Call number
SVT >

D. In the sdpd (set default paging data) and

ssct (set speed call table) command.
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
22 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Normally by pressing "RETURN" only to a prompt, results in no data being set and the command
exits. However, these two commands do not exit on pressing "RETURN", they always prompt for all
parameters and if you type "RETURN" only, then the data field remains unchanged.

E. Command recall buffer.

The Service Terminal has a command recall buffer of 10 commands. Using the up-arrow and
down-arrow keys, the last 10 commands can be recalled.

F. Command Line Editing.

A command line can be edited at any time:

1. Left-arrow (move cursor left one character)

2. Right-arrow (move cursor right one character)
3. Delete (delete character to left of cursor)
4. ctrl-e (insert one character at cursor)
5. ctrl-x (delete the command line)
6. RETURN (execute the command line)

G. SVT Prompt Mode.

The command Set SVT Prompt Mode (SSPM) is used to enable/disable the stage number in the SVT
prompt.

SVT > sspm

Enable Stage Number in SVT Prompt ? <Y/N> : y
SVT >

SVT > sspm

Enable Stage Number in SVT Prompt ? <Y/N> : n
SVT >

In a multistage system, this change is valid to all nodes.

The default mode is without the stage prompt.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 23

8. HELP COMMANDS.
All help commands can be listed:

SERVICE TERMINAL GENERAL COMMANDS

=================================

HELP Help, what are you reading now !

H Help, what are you reading now !
? Help, what are you reading now !

! Comment

HS Help on Set commands

HL Help on List and Get commands
HDT Help on Device type
HPT Help on Privilege Type
HPC Help on Privacy Category
HFTL Help on Feature Text Language
HPDA Help on Program Distribution Allocation
HD Help on Debug mode
HT Help on Trace commands
HM Help on Monitor commands

BACKUP Perform backup of all system and subscriber data

BACKSYS Perform backup of system data only
BACKSUB Perform backup of subscriber data only
BACKDRV Perform backup of communication driver data
BACKTTY Perform backup of communication TTY data
BACKSTART Stop catalogue sorting in CB901-M network Controller
BACKSTOP Start catalogue sorting in CB901-M Network Controller

LOG Service terminal log-out

TIME List date and time

CALOFF Stop real time clock

RESET Reset stage

LOOPD Serial Port Loop-back Test

RD Remote Dialling
CSD Copy System Data

* Enter Debug Mode

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
24 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

9. SET COMMANDS.
All set commands can be listed by the HS:

SERVICE TERMINAL SET COMMANDS

=============================

SCD Set Call Digit

SCDU Set Call Digit Undefined

SCN Set Call Number

SCNU Set Call Number Undefined

SCNP Set Call Number with Paging data

SPN Set Pager Number
SPND Set Pager Number Default
SPRT Set Paging Reply Time
SDPD Set Default Paging Data (prefix and time)
SPPD Set Pre-programmed Pager Data
SSPPD Set System Pre-programmed Pager Data
SPAN Set Pager Alarm Number

SCID Set Caller ID

SSE Set Status Event

SSO Set Status Output
SSOT Set Status Output Text

SPC Set Privacy Category

SDT Set Device Type
SPT Set Privilege Type
SFA Set Feature Access

SST Set Subscriber Time

SSP Set Subscriber Parameter

SSCT Set Speed Call Table

SSCTM Set Speed Call Table Multi
SSCG Set Speed Call Group

STLD Set Tie Line Data

SOTLAC Set Own Tie Line Area Code

SDDD Set Direct Dialling Data

SSDDD Set System Direct Dialling Data

SACN Set All Call Number

SACNU Set All Call Number Undefined

SGCN Set Group Call Number

SGCNU Set Group Call Number Undefined
SGCM Set Group Call Member

SHN Set Hunt Number

SEN Set Emergency Number
SAC Set Access Code

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 25

SACD Set Access Code Digits

SCP Set Conference Participants

SSTN Set Secretary Transfer Number

SCFN Set Call Forward Number

SCASN Set CAS Number

SCASNU Set CAS Number Undefined
SCASPD Set CAS Pager Data
SCAST Set CAS Times
SCASM Set CAS Member
SCASMU Set CAS Member Undefined
SCASHN Set CAS Hunt Number
SCASPDC Set CAS Program Distribution Channel
SCASMD Set CAS Mode
SCASDL Set CAS Direct Log-on
SCASFT Set CAS Feature Text
SCASRM Set CAS Relay Mode
SCASLM Set CAS LED Mode
SCASSM Set CAS Scroll Mode
SCASLRM Set CAS Local Reset Mode
SCASGCG Set CAS Group Call Group
SCASOFL Set CAS Over-Flow Limit

SSECT Set Sector (Member/Receive/Transmit)

SDCN Set Dummy Call Number

SPDM Set Program Distribution Mode

SPDC Set Program Distribution Channel
SPDA Set Program Distribution Allocation
SPDGCM Set Program Distribution Group Call Member
SPDGCN Set Program Distribution Group Call Number
SPDGCNU Set Program Distribution Group Call Number Undefined
SPDGCI Set Program Distribution Group Call Input
SLPDGCM Set Local Program Distribution Group Call Member
SLPDGCN Set Local Program Distribution Group Call Number
SLPDGCI Set Local Program Distribution Group Call Input
SPDICM Set Program Distribution Info Channel Member
SPDICN Set Program Distribution Info Channel Number
SPDICNU Set Program Distribution Info Channel Number Undefined
SPDICI Set Program Distribution Info Channel Input

SFC Set Feature Code (system wide feature codes)

SFCU Set Feature Code Undefined

SFT Set Feature Text

SFTL Set Feature Text Language

SETP Set External Trunk Position

SETPU Set External Trunk Position Undefined

SMDT Set Message Display Text

SLEU Set Line Equipment Undefined

SRM Set Relay Mode
SMDM Set Message Display Mode

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
26 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SDCDT Set Direct Conference Dialling Table

SISCT Set Inter Stage Communication Table

SPGSC Set Privilege General Set Commands

SPGLC Set Privilege General List Commands
SPHC Set Privilege Help Commands
SPTC Set Privilege Trace Commands
SPMC Set Privilege Miscellaneous Commands
SWAP SWAP call number

SDATE Set date and time (real time watch)

SSN Set System Name (custom name)
SUP Set User Password (don't use it if you don't mean it !!)
ST Set Time (system wide timers)
STT Set Test Time (system wide test timers)
SP Set Parameter (system wide parameters)
STP Set Test Parameter (system wide test parameters)
SCC Set Counter Clear (clear stage wide counters)
SSPM Set SVT Prompt Mode (include stage number in SVT prompt)
SD Set Driver (define serial port type)
STTY Set serial port characteristics
SCOM set ack/nak,retries,timeout
SHBR Set History Buffer Reset
SPM Set Printout Mode
SLO Set List Output (redirect list output to printer or SVT)
STO Set Trace Output (redirect trace output to printer or SVT)

SSCACC Set Subscriber Card ACK Counter Clear (NFE1813 only)

SSCMCC Set Subscriber Card Message Counter Clear (NFE1813 only)

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 27

10. LIST AND GET COMMANDS

All list commands can be listed by HL:

SERVICE TERMINAL LIST AND GET COMMANDS
======================================
LCD List Call Digits

LCN List Call Number

LCNC List Call Number Continuously
LCNU List Call Number Undefined

LCNP List Call Number with Paging data

LCNPC List Call Number with Paging data Continuously
LDPD List Default Paging Data
LPN List Pager Number
LPRT List Paging Reply Time
LPPD List Pre-programmed Pager Data
LSPPD List System Pre-programmed Pager Data
LPAN List Pager Alarm Number
LSE List Status Event
GSE Get Status Event
LSO List Status Output
LSOT List Status Output Text

LCND List Call Number Data

LCID List Caller ID

LST List Subscriber Time

LPST List Programmed Subscriber Time
LDST List Default Subscriber Time

LPC List Privacy Category

LPDC List Program Distribution Channel

LSP List Subscriber Parameter

LSCT List Speed Call Table

LSCG List Speed Call Group
GSCG Get Speed Call Group

LTLD List Tie Line Data

LOTLAC List Own Tie Line Area Code

LDDD List Direct Dialling Data

LSDDD List System Direct Dialling Data

LACN List All Call Number

LGCN List Group Call Number

LGCM List Group Call Member
LGCMN List Group Call Member Numeric
GGCM Get Group Call Member

LPDA List Program Distribution Allocation

LPDGCM List Program Distribution Group Call Member
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
28 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

LPDGCMN List Program Distribution Group Call Member Numeric

LPDGCN List Program Distribution Group Call Number
LPDGCI List Program Distribution Group Call Input
LLPDGCM List Local Program Distribution Group Call Member
LLPDGCMN List Local Program Distribution Group Call Member Numeric
LLPDGCN List Local Program Distribution Group Call Number
LLPDGCI List Local Program Distribution Group Call Input
LPDICM List Program Distribution Info Channel Member
LPDICMN List Program Distribution Info Channel Member Number
LPDICN List Program Distribution Info Channel Number
LPDICI List Program Distribution Info Channel Input

LHN List Hunt Number

LEN List Emergency Number
LAC List Access Code

LACD List Access Code Digits

LCP List Conference Participants

LSTN List Secretary Transfer Number

LCFN List Call Forward Number

LCASN List CAS Number

LCAST List CAS Times
LPCAST List Programmed CAS Times
LDCAST List Default CAS Times
LCASM List CAS Member
LCASPD List CAS Pager Data
LCASFT List CAS Feature Text
LCASDL List CAS Direct Logon
LCASLM List CAS LED Mode
LCASSM List CAS Scroll Mode
LCASLRM List CAS Local Reset Mode
LCASGCG List CAS Group Call Group
LCASOFL List CAS OverFlow Limit

LSECT List Sector (All)

LSECTN List Sector (All) Numeric
GSECT Get Sector(s)

LPM List Printout Mode

LPDM List Program Distribution Mode
LRM List Relay Mode
LMDM List Message Display Mode

LFC List Feature Code

LFT List Feature Text

LFTL List Feature Text Language
LMDT List Message Display Text

LDT List Device Type

GDT Get Device Type

LPT List Privilege Type

GPT Get Privilege Type

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 29

LFA List Feature Access

GFA Get Feature Access

LETP List External Trunk Position

GETS Get External Trunk Status

LDCDT List Direct Conference Dialling Table

LISCT List Inter Stage Communication Table

LLE List Line Equipment

LLEC List Line Equipment Continuously
LLEU List Undefined Line Equipment positions
LLEUC List Undefined Line Equipment positions Continuously

LPGC List Privilege General Commands

LPMC List Privilege Miscellaneous Commands
LPHC List Privilege Help Commands
LPTC List Privilege Trace Commands

LLMS List Line Monitoring Status

LID List Individual Data

LSS List Switch Setting
LUP List User Password (only as system user)
LSN List System Name (custom name)
LUM List User Mode (user,system or super)
LV List Version
LHB List History Buffer
LT List Time (system wide timers)
LTT List Test Time (system wide test timers)
LP List Parameter (system wide parameters)
LTP List Test Parameter (system wide test parameters)
LC List Counter (stage wide counters)
GC Get Counter (search for stage wide counters not zero)
LTTY List serial port characteristics
LCOM List serial port statistics

LSCV List Subscriber Card Version (NFE1813 only)

LSCAC List Subscriber Card ACK Counter (NFE1813 only)
LSCMC List Subscriber Card Message Counter (NFE1813 only)
LSCRT List Subscriber Card Run Ticks (NFE1813 only)
LSCST List Subscriber Card Switch and Test point (NFE1813 only)

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
30 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Help on specific data items:

HELP PRIVILEGE TYPE

SVT > hpt
=====================
A call number's privilege type can be one or several of the following :

1 All Call
2 Group Call
3 Priority
4 SVIM (Listen to other's Personal SVIM Messages)
5 Program Distribution Group Call
6 Local Program Distribution Group Call
7 Program Distribution Input Channel
8 CAS Operator Group Call
9 Disable timer on Direct Dial tone A.(Key F)
10 A-subscriber Always Page
11 Not Used
12 CAS Priority
13 Not Used
14 Privacy Test Line Monitoring
15 Convert (short)DC-shift to Direct Dial Table Tone C
16 Data Transmission (DTMF)
17 Open Station
18 All Call X-out
19 Not Used
20 Remote Dialling Receive
21 Hurry Up
22 Convert long DC-shift to Direct Dial Table Tone D
23 Disable DTMF-digit input
24 Display Visicall AE111 Information Automatic
25 CAS Enable Privacy Switch
26 B-subscriber Always Page
27 Combine A and B Subscriber Pager Data
28 Display Additional Call Data on B-subscriber
29 Not Used
30 Not Used
31 Not Used
32 Not Used

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 31

HELP PRIVACY CATEGORY

SVT > hpc
=====================
A call number's privacy category can be one of the following:

A Privacy A
B Privacy B
AA Privacy Always A
AB Privacy Always B
N Privacy never

HELP DEVICE TYPE

SVT > hdt
================

A call number's device type can be one of the following:

1 AA903, AA904, AA905 ...

2 AA960, AA961,
3 AE111
4 CE921
N None Device (i.e. Dummy Call Number)

HELP FEATURE TEXT LANGUAGE

SVT > hftl
==========================

A system’s feature text language can be one of the following:

1 English
2 Norwegian
3 German
4 French

HELP PROGRAM DISTRIBUTION ALLOCATION

SVT > hpda
======================================
A system's program distribution allocation can be one of the following :

1 Program Distribution
2 Program Distribution Group Call
3 Local Program Distribution Group Call
4 Program Distribution Info Channel

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
32 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

11. FEATURE LISTING

A wide range of features are built-in the CPU card NFE 1683's software. Both the Ring-Master
Double-stage CB 901-2, Triple stage CB 901-3 and Multi-stage CB 901-Multi will have different layout
configurations. The SVT programme is used to programme the different features and to configure the
system layouts.

Ring-Master A/S Systems reserves all rights to change the listed feature description/specification, at
any time without notice in pursuance of a policy of continuous technical improvement.

The features are:

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS:

1. SINGLE STAGE SYSTEM CB 901

2. DOUBLE STAGE SYSTEM CB 901-2
3. TRIPLE STAGE SYSTEM CB 901-3
4. MULTI STAGE SYSTEM CB 901-M (Multi)

STANDARD FEATURES:

5. ORDINARY CALL
6. NUMBERING
7. LOUDSPEAKING/CONFIDENTIAL
8. MICROPHONE CUT-OUT
9. MANUAL CONTROL/T-SIMPLEX MODE
10. PRIVACY, MODE A
" MODE B
11. CAMP ON
12. HURRY UP
13. ALARM FEATURE
14. MULTICHANNEL PROGRAMME DISTRIBUTION

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 33

PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

15. DATA TRANSMISSION

16. SPEED-DIALLING
17. DIRECT ACCESS
18. DIRECT DIALLING
19. PRIORITY
20. ALL CALL
21. GROUP CALL
22. HUNT FUNCTION
23. CONFERENCE
24. CALL FORWARD
25. SECRETARY TRANSFER
26. CALL TRANSFER
27. PAGING
28. CENTRAL ANSWERING SERVICE
29. PROGRAMMING CALL NUMBER FROM ANY MASTER STATION
30. PROGRAMMING CALL NUMBER FROM A SINGLE MASTER STATION
31. CALL BACK
32. CALL REPLY
33. LAST NUMBER REDIAL
34. CALL LAST CALLER
35. SECTORING
36. DUMMY NUMBER WITH AUTO-PAGING
37. OPEN STATION
38. DIRECT CONFERENCE DIALLING
39. VISICALL FEATURES
- CALLER IDENTIFICATION
- MESSAGE DISPLAY
40. SVIM (STORED VOICE, INFORMATION and MESSAGE) FEATURES
- ABSENT ANSWERING SERVICE
- PERSONAL MESSAGE (VERBAL MAILBOX)
- VERBAL REMINDER
41. INTERSYSTEM TIE-LINE
42. REMOTE CONTROLLING
43. REMOTE DIALLING

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
34 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

12. SINGLE STAGE SYSTEM CB 901

The Basic Card-set DP 952 consists of the following cards:

NFE 1683 Processor Card

NFE 1606 Timing Control Card
NFE 1519 Switch Control Card
NFE 1607 Audio Control Card
NFE 1521 Link Control Card (x2)
NFE 1528 Power Card

The Single Stage system CB 901 gives max. 240 subscribers.

The following programming to configure the system layout is necessary in the CB 901 system:

A. SET THE STAGE NUMBER.

To set the stage number use switch group U19 on the Timing Control Card NFE 1606, switches 1,
2, 3, 4 and 5. A Single Stage System CB 901 must always be programmed as stage no. 1.

Switch number 1 2 3 4 5

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

B. NUMBER OF DIGITS IN CALL NUMBER.

To set the number of digits in the call number, use switch group U19 on the Timing Control Card NFE
1606, switches 6, 7 and 8.

C. SYSTEM SIZE - NUMBER OF STAGES.

To set the size of the system, use switch group U25 on the Timing Control Card NFE 1606, switches
1 and 2. Set both switches in position OFF for Single Stage CB 901.

For all other feature/software programming reference is made to the relevant chapter in this manual.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 35

13. DOUBLE STAGE SYSTEM CB 901-2

The two stages can be connected via an analogue, or a 2mBits digital link.

13.1 ANALOGUE

The CB 901-2 system is equipped with the following items:

- 2 pc. CB 901 systems
- 2 pc. Inter-link B Card NFE 1545 (DP 963), one in each stage
- 1 pc. Inter-link C Card DN 946, between the stages.

In systems with extreme high traffic, two Inter-ink B cards can be installed in each stage giving 16 (2
x 8) audio channels.

Data communication will take place between the 20 mA current loop ports on the two cpu card
NFE 1683.

Cable requirements between the two stages in a CB 901-2 system:

- 2 pair for data transmission
- 2 pair per audio channel (inter-link) Max. distance between stages is 1.5 km.

A CB 901-2 system with 8 inter-links gives (2 x 240) 480 subscribers.

The Programme Distribution Card DP 977 will NOT occupy one subscriber card position in the stages.

A CB901-2 system with 16 inter-links gives ( 2 x 239 ) 478 subscribers.

The Programme Distribution card DP977 WILL occupy one subscriber card position in each stage.
The total number of subscribers are then ( 2 x 231 ) 462 subscribers.

The following programming is necessary in the CB 901-2 system:

A. SET THE STAGE NUMBER.

To set the stage number use switch group U19 on the Timing Control Card NFE 1606, switches 1, 2,
3, 4 and 5. In a Double Stage System CB 901-2, one stage must be programmed as stage no. 1 and
the other as stage no. 2.

Switch number 1 2 3 4 5

stage no. 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

stage no. 2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

B. NUMBER OF DIGITS IN CALL NUMBER.

To set the number of digits in the call number use switch group U19 on the Timing Control Card NFE
1606, switches 6, 7 and 8, see table on page 9. Set switches to same positions in both stages.

C. SYSTEM SIZE - NUMBER OF STAGES.

To set the size of the system use switch group U25 on the Timing Control Card NFE 1606, switches 1
and 2.
In both stages, set switch no. 1 ON and switch no. 2 OFF.

D. DATA TRANSMISSION SPEED (BAUD RATE) BETWEEN STAGES..

In both stages the baud rate must be programmed to the same value.
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
36 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

If both stages are installed in the same room it is recommended to use 4800 or 9600 baud. Both
stages must be connected to the service terminal independently for programming of baud rate. To
check the existing baud rate use the LTTY command. The data port Isc1 should be used in both
stages. Type I to examine the existing data.

This adjustment can only be done in a system with analogue interconnection.

No adjustment is possible in a system with digital 2Mbits interconnection.

SVT > ltty

Driver <Isc1/sVim/Pager/pC/Dsp/Etp/svT/pRinter> : i
Stage <1..2> : 1
Driver type Isc 1
Driver status Enabled
Stage 1
Port 1
Baud Rate 9600
Bits per Character 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
SVT >

NOTE. The port identification Isc1 is added in a Double Stage system CB 901-2.

Use STTY command in both stages to programme the IN/OUT port Isc1. Type in the required baud
rate,- for ex., 4800. Set the remaining parameters to:
- Bits per Character : 8
- Parity: N
- Stop Bits: 1

Note: The STTY command have no function when we have a 2Mbits connection between the
stages.

SVT > stty

Driver <Isc1/sVim/Pager/pC/Dsp/Etp/svT/pRinter> : i
Stage <1..2> : 1
Baud Rate <110/300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200> : 4800
Bits per Character <7..8> : 8
Parity <None/Odd/Even> : n
Stop Bits <1..2> : 1
SVT >

Note: When changing the baud rate of ISC, you must always change that of the remote stage first,
then the stage you are logged on to.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 37

E. AUDIO TRANSMISSION BETWEEN STAGES (INTERLINKS).

For audio transmission between stages, additional printed circuit boards, Inter-link B, NFE 1545, must
be installed in each stage. Each card supports 8 audio channels and a maximum of two cards can be
installed in each stage, giving 16 channels between the stages. Normally, only one card is installed (8
channels).
Please, see the Ring-Master Installation Manual for installation details.
Card position 13 (and 12) in the Basic Card-rack DP 979 are used for Inter-link B
cards, hex. pos F0-F7, (E8-EF).
The default set-up of inter-link between the stages is 8, hex. pos F0-F7, and no SVT programming is
necessary. Using the SVT command SISCT (Set Inter Stage Communication Table) you can specify
the quantity of audio channels (from 1 to 8, hex. pos F0 to F7).

Note: The SISCT command is also used when we have a 2Mbits connection between the stages.

Example.

Changing from 8 to 4 audio channels between the stages:

SVT > SISCT

ISC Table <1..2> : 1
ISC Position [1] <$0..$fe/U> : $f0
ISC Position [2] <$0..$fe/U> : $f1
ISC Position [3] <$0..$fe/U> : $f2
ISC Position [4] <$0..$fe/U> : $f3
ISC Position [5] <$0..$fe/U : u
Stage <1,-,2/*> : *

13.2 DIGITAL 2MBITS CONNECTION

In each stage the 2Mbits card NFE1692 ( DP706) will replace the NFE1545 card.
In addition we will also use one DP704 optical fibre interface, or one DP705 cable interface, common
for both stages.
The DN946 will not be used.
We will use two optical fibres, or two pairs cable for interconnection between the two stages.

We can use the SISCT command to adjust the number of inter-links.

This is only interesting when you are connected to leased 2 Mbits lines, or if you have a hardware
fault on the NFE1692 card.

BAUD rate cannot be adjusted.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
38 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

14. TRIPLE STAGE SYSTEM CB 901-3

The CPU card NFE 1683 gives the possibility to configure a new Ring-Master exchange layout,- the
Triple Stage System.

The 3 stages can be interconnected via an analogue, or a 2mBits digital link.

13.1 ANALOGUE
The CB 901-3 system is equipped with the following items:
- 3 pcs. CB 901 systems
- 6 pcs. Inter-link B Card NFE 1545 (DP 963), two in each stage giving 8 audio channels.
- 3 pcs. Inter-link C Card DN 946, between the stages.

Data communication will take place between each CPU card (in a triangle), 20 mA current loop ports
on the new cpu card NFE 1683.

Audio communication (8 audio/inter-link channels) is also working in a triangle configuration between

the Inter-link B cards.

Cable requirements between the stages in a CB 901-3 system:

- 2 pair for data transmission
- 2 pair per audio channel (inter-link) Max. distance between the stages is 1.5 km

A CB 901-3 system gives ( 3 x 239 ) 717 subscribers.

The Programme Distribution Card DP 977 will occupy one subscriber card position (8 subscribers) in
each stage.
A CB901-3 with Programme Distribution in all stages gives ( 3 x 231 ) 693 subscribers

The following programming to configure the system layout is necessary in the CB 901-3 system:

A. SET THE STAGE NUMBER.

To set the stage number use switch group U19 on the Timing Control Card NFE 1606, switches 1, 2,
3, 4 and 5. In a Triple Stage System CB 901-3, each stage must be given an individual stage no,-
stage no 1, 2 or 3.

Switch number 1 2 3 4 5

stage no. 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

stage no. 2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
stage no. 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF

B. NUMBER OF DIGITS IN CALL NUMBER.

To set the number of digits in the call number use switch- group U19 on the Timing Control Card NFE
1606,switches 6, 7 and 8, see table on page 9. Set switches to same positions in all three stages.

C. SYSTEM SIZE - NUMBER OF STAGES.

To set the size of the system use switch group U25 on the Timing Control Card NFE 1606, switches 1
and 2. In all 3 stages, set switch no. 1 OFF and switch no. 2 ON.

D. DATA TRANSMISSION SPEED (BAUD RATE) BETWEEN STAGES.

The interconnection between stages will be in a triangle:
- slave 1 and 2
- slave 1 and 3
- slave 2 and 3

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 39

The CPU card NFE 1683 has two 20 mA current loop IN/OUT ports. These can be programmed to
operate with different baud rate, i.e., transmission speed between stage 1 and 2 can be different
between 1 and 3 and/or 2 and 3. Important is to programme the same baud rate to IN/OUT ports
linked together (1 and 2, 1 and 3, 2 and 3).
If all stages are installed in the same room it is recommended to use 4800 or 9600 baud.
Each stage must be connected to the service terminal independently for programming of baud rate.
Use the LTTY command to examine the existing data in each stage.

SVT > ltty

Driver <Isc1/sVim/Pager/pC/Dsp/Etp/svT/pRinter> : i
Stage <1..2> : 1
Driver type Isc 1
Driver status Enabled
Stage 1
Port 1
Baud Rate 4800
Bits per Character 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
SVT 1>

- Data port ISC1 in stage no. 1 links to ISC1 in stage no.2

- Data port ISC2 in stage no. 1 links to ISC1 in stage no.3
- Data port ISC2 in stage no. 2 links to ISC2 in stage no.3

NOTE: The port identifications Isc1 and Isc2 are added in a Triple Stage system CB 901-3.

TRIPLE-STAGE SYSTEM CB901-3

ISC1 ISC1 ISC2 ISC1

ISC 2

DP 952E DP 952E DP 952E

STAGE NO. 1 STAGE NO. 2 STAGE NO. 3

Use the STTY command to programme the different data ports.

In this example, stage no. 1 the baud rate to stage no. 2 is set to 4800 and to stage no. 3 to 9600.
Set the remaining parameters to:
- Bits per Character : 8
- Parity: N
- Stop Bits: 1

SVT > stty

Driver <Isc1/iSc2/sVim/Pager/pC/Dsp/Etp/svT/pRinter> : i
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
40 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Stage <1..3> : 1
Baud Rate <110/300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200> : 4800
Bits per Character <7..8> : 8
Parity <None/Odd/Even> : n
Stop Bits <1..2> : 1
SVT >

SVT > stty

Driver <Iscl/iSc2/sVim/Pager/pC/Dsp/Etp/svT/pRinter> : s
Stage <1..3> : 1
Baud Rate <110/300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200> : 9600
Bits per Character <7..8> : 8
Parity <None/Odd/Even> : n
Stop Bits <1..2> : 1
SVT >

Then do programming in stage no. 2 and 3, (Isc1 and iSc2 ports).

Note: When changing the baud rate of ISC, you must always change that of the remote stage first,
then the stage you are logged on to.

E. AUDIO TRANSMISSION BETWEEN STAGES (INTERLINKS).

For audio transmission between the stages, additional printed circuit boards, Interlink B, NFE 1545,
must be installed, two in each stage. Each card supports 8 audio channels, installed in a triangle
configuration between the stages.
Please, see the Ring-Master Installation Manual for installation details.
Card position 13 and 12 in the Basic Cardrack DP 979 are used for Interlink B
cards, hex. pos F0-F7, E8-EF.

Stage no. 1, Interlink Card in pos. 13, (F0-F7), communicates with stage no. 2, Interlink Card in
pos. 13, (F0-F7).
Stage no. 1, Interlink Card in pos. 12, (E8-EF), communicates with stage no. 3, Interlink Card in
pos. 13, (F0-F7).
Stage no. 2, Interlink Card in pos. 12, (E8-EF), communicates with stage no. 3, Interlink Card in
pos. 12, (E8-EF).

Using the SVT command SISCT (Set Inter Stage Communication Table) you can specify the quantity
of audio channels (from 1 to 8, hex. pos F0 to F7).
The default numbers of channels are 8 and the hex. pos. as listed above.
Table no. 1 is indicating pos. F0-F7, and table no. 2 pos E8-EF.

14.2 DIGITAL 2MBITS CONNECTION

In each stage the 2 x 2Mbits card NFE1692 ( DP706) will replace the 2 x NFE1545 card.
In addition we will also use 3 x DP704 optical fibre interface, or 3 x DP705 cable interface, common
for both stages.
The DN946 will not be used.
We will use two optical fibres, or two pairs cable for interconnection between each stage.

We can use the SISCT command to adjust the number of inter-links.

This is only interesting when you are connected to leased 2 Mbits lines, or if you have a hardware
fault on the NFE1692 card.

BAUD rate cannot be adjusted.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 41

15. MULTI STAGE SYSTEM CB 901-MULTI

A system with the capacity between 4 and up to max. 30 stages is named CB 901-M. In this
configuration each slave is connected to a Digital Network Controller (DNC) and cabling will run
between each stage and this unit, no interconnection between stages, (as in CB 901-2 and CB 901-3
systems).

The interconnection between each stage and the DNC is only via a 2Mbits digital link.
Analogue connection is not possible.

The CB 901-M system is equipped with the following items:

- From 4 to 30 pcs. CB 901 stages.
- 1 pc. Digital Network Controller (DNC), two if the system is a Double DNC system.
- 1 pc. Digital Network Interface (DN), two in each stage if the system is a Double DNC
system.
- 2 pc.s Trunk Interfaces, Optical fibre or Cable, one on CB 901 side and one at the DNC
side.

SINGLE DNC system

The CB 901-M system gives 240 subscribers per stage. The Programme Distribution Card DP 977 will
NOT occupy any subscriber card position in the stage.

DOUBLE DNC system

The CB 901-M system gives 239 subscribers per stage. The Programme Distribution Card DP 977
WILL occupy one subscriber card position ( 8 subscribers ) in each stage.
The CB901-M system with Programme Distribution gives 231 subscribers per stage.

The following programming to configure the system layout is necessary in the CB 901-M system:

A. SET THE STAGE NUMBER.

To set the stage number, in the CB 901 stage, use switch group U19 on the Timing Control Card NFE
1606, switches 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.

Switch group U19,

This switch group determines the stage number (1-30) and number of digits in the call number (2-6).

Switch number Stage:

1 2 3 4 5

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1

OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 2
ON ON OFF OFF OFF 3
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 4
ON OFF ON OFF OFF 5
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
OFF ON ON ON ON 30

In the Digital Network Controller the switches must be set accordingly. Us the switch group U25 on the
Network Processor Card NFE 1688.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
42 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

B. NUMBER OF DIGITS IN CALL NUMBER.

To set the number of digits in the call number use switch group U19 on the Timing Control Card NFE
1606, switches 6, 7 and 8. Set switches to same positions in all stages.

Switch number Digits in call number

6 7 8

OFF ON OFF 2
ON ON OFF 3
OFF OFF ON 4
ON OFF ON 5
OFF ON ON 6

In the Digital Network Controller switch group U25 on Network Processor Card NFE 1688 must be set
in the following position:

Switch number Digits in call number

6 7

OFF OFF 3
ON OFF 4
OFF ON 5
ON ON 6

C. SYSTEM SIZE - NUMBER OF STAGES.

To set the size of the system use switch group U25 on the Timing Control Card NFE 1606, switches 1
and 2. In all stages, set both switch no. 1 and 2 ON.

Switch number System type

1 2

ON ON Multi (CB 901-M, 4-30)

NOTE:
The DNC will also work for interconnection in a 2 stage and 3 stage system.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 43

16. NUMBERING/CALL DIGITS

The following SVT commands are used in this chapter:
LCD = list call digits
SCD = set call digit
SCDU = set call digit undefined

The number plan is flexible. Any line position number can be assigned any call number.

A call number may be 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 digits long. As default, call numbers begin with 10 for 2 digit
systems, 100 for 3 digit system, 1000 for 4 digit systems and so on. The number of digits in a call
number is determined by switches on the Timing Control Card NFE 1606.

Using the Service Terminal it is possible to define the first digit of a call number to be any of 1 - 9.
Digits not used as first digit of a call number can be programmed to any feature code.

Care must be taken so that there is no conflict with existing feature codes. To list the call digits valid
as first digit in a call number use the SVT command LCD (list call digits):

SVT > lcd

Call Digit Code Default code
===========================================================================
Call Digit [1] 1 1
Call Digit [2] 2 2
Call Digit [3] 3 3
Call Digit [4] 4 4
Call Digit [5] 5 5
Call Digit [6] 6 6
Call Digit [7] Undef Undef
Call Digit [8] Undef Undef
Call Digit [9] Undef Undef

Digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 can be used as first digit in a call number.

Example no. 1.

As default, digit 8 is used as feature code for paging. In this example, digit 6 is requested as feature
for paging. First digit 6 must be made undefined as call digit (first digit in a call number). Use the SVT
command SCDU (set call digit undefined).

SVT > scdu

Call Digit <1..9>. : 6
SVT >

Using the list command LCD, the new list will indicate the change for digit 6:

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
44 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SVT > lcd

Call Digit Code Default code
===========================================================================
Call Digit [1] 1 1
Call Digit [2] 2 2
Call Digit [3] 3 3
Call Digit [4] 4 4
Call Digit [5] 5 5
Call Digit [6] Undef 6
Call Digit [7] Undef Undef
Call Digit [8] Undef Undef
Call Digit [9] Undef Undef
SVT >

Digit 6 is now made undefined as a call digit (first digit in a call number) and can be programmed as
feature code for paging. See example in the next chapter FEATURE CODES, using command SFC
(set feature code). After that programming, digit 8 is free for call digit and can be programmed as an
ordinary call digit by the command SCD:

SVT > scd

Call Digit <1..9> : 8

The new list for call digits will be,- use command LCD:

SVT > lcd

Call Digit Code Default code
===========================================================================
Call Digit [1] 1 1
Call Digit [2] 2 2
Call Digit [3] 3 3
Call Digit [4] 4 4
Call Digit [5] 5 5
Call Digit [6] Undef 6
Call Digit [7] Undef Undef
Call Digit [8] 8 Undef
Call Digit [9] Undef Undef
SVT >

NOTE: Before programming 8 as a new call digit, 8 must be changed or made undefined as a feature
code.
See example in next chapter; FEATURE CODES.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 45

17. FEATURE ACCESS/FEATURE CODES/FEATURE COUNTER.

The following SVT commands are used in this chapter:
LFC = list feature codes
SFC = set feature code
SFCU = set feature code undefined
SFA = set feature access
LFA = list feature access
GFA = get feature access
LC = list counter
SCC = set counter clear
GC = get counter

When commissioning a CB 901 system, the standard (default) program will be loaded into the battery
RAM. No SVT programming is necessary if the customer requires no feature reconfiguration. Each
feature has a default feature code. All codes can be listed by the SVT command LFC. Each feature is
given a feature number. To list one specific feature, type the correct feature number. To display a
complete features list, type * (star).
Each feature code can be subscriber individually enabled/disabled. Use SVT command SFA (set
feature access). As default, all subscribers have access to a limited number of features. Use the
command LFA (list feature access) or GFA (get feature access) to see the list of disabled and
enabled feature codes.

SVT > LFC

Feature id <10,-,67/*> : *
Feature Feature Default
id code code
===============================================================
10 Call Forward A 910 910
11 Call Forward B 911 911
12 Call Forward C 912 912
13 Call Forward Cancel 913 913
14 Direct Dialling 914 914
15 Call Reply 915 915
16 Call Transfer 916 916
17 Master Station Programming 917 917
18 Programme Distribution 98 98
19 SVIM Absent Registration 919 919
20 SVIM Voice Reminder 920 920
21 SVIM Voice Mail 921 921
22 Priority 0 0
23 Speed Call 923 923
24 Paging / Call Back 8 8
25 All/Group Call Reply 90 90
26 Visicall Caller Id 926 926
27 Visicall Message Display 927 927
28 CAS Logon 928 928
29 SWAM Voice Group Message 929 929
30 Pager Alarm 1 930 930
31 Pager Alarm 2 931 931
32 CAS Night Transfer 932 932
33 CAS Direct logon 933 933
34 CAS Direct logout 934 934
35 Secretary Transfer 935 935
36 Secretary Transfer Cancel 936 936
37 Direct Conference Dialling 937 937
38 SWAM Delete All Voice Mails 938 938

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
46 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

39 Display Number/unit on LED 939 939

40 Last Number Redial 940 940
41 Call Last Caller 941 941
42 SWAM System Message 942 942
43 Remote Dial 943 943
44 Remote Control 944 944
45 Call Redirect 945 945
46 Call Reconnect 946 946
47 Program PD channel 947 947
48 Step ProgDist Volume 948 948
49 Step ProgDist Channel 949 949
50 Tie Line 950 950
51 Privacy 951 951
52 Local Door Access 952 952
53 Remote Door Access 953 953
54 Personal Door Access 954 954
55 Absence Registration Time 955 955
56 Absence Registration Date 956 956
57 Message Display TX 957 957
58 Message Display RX 958 958
59 Speed Group Phone Book 959 959
60 Remote display 960 960
61 CAS Local Reset 961 961
62 Program PDIC member 962 962
63 Selective Group Call 963 963
64 Forced Programme Distribution 964 964
65 Privacy Call Request 965 965
66 Direct Unit Call 966 966
67 Free Seating 967 967
68 Silent reques 968 968
69 Time zone adjustment 969 969
70 CAS Request 970 970
71 Not Used 971 971
72 Not Used 972 972
73 Not Used 973 973
74 Not Used 974 974
75 Not Used 975 975
76 Not Used 976 976
77 Not Used 977 977
78 Not Used 978 978
79 Not Used 979 979
80 Not Used Undef Undef
81 ETP Call Digit 7 7
82 ETP Call Digit Undef Undef
83 ETP Call Digit Undef Undef
84 ETP Call Digit Undef Undef
85 ETP Call Digit Undef Unde
86 ETP Call Digit Undef Undef
87 ETP Call Digit Undef Undef
88 ETP Call Digit Undef Undef
89 ETP Call Digit Undef Undef

ETP: External Transfer Protocol.

Protocol for set-up of audio communication with external equipment.
Data is transferred via RS232.
Audio connection is analogue, or digital via a 2Mbits link.
To list the feature code for paging, use command LFC and type feature ID 24.
SVT > LFC

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 47

Feature id <10,-,67/*> : 24
Feature Feature Default
id code code
===============================================================
24 Paging / Call Back 8 8
SVT >

This listing was carried out before the feature code for paging was changed to digit 6.
With reference to Example no. 1 (chapter NUMBERING) digit 6 was requested as feature code for
paging. The digit 6 was made undefined as call digit. Use command SFC to change the feature code
for paging to digit 6.
The feature code for paging can be changed to the following values:
- digits in the range 0 - 999999
- default value 8
- undefined

SVT > sfc

Feature id <10..67> : 24
Feature code Paging / Call Back (8) <0.999999/D/U> : 6
SVT >

This will change the status of the Feature Code List. Use the command LFC. Digit 6 is now listed as
feature code for paging.
Using the IN-LINE format:

SVT > LFC 24

Feature Feature Default
id code code
===============================================================
24 Paging / Call Back 6 8

To undefine one or several feature codes, starting with a specific code, use the command SFCU.
To change any other feature codes, the procedure will be similar as illustrated in example no. 1.
Note: Before programming a feature code, the new digit(s) used must be undefined as call digit or
existing feature code. A digit programmed as "call digit" (first digit in a call number) can not be given
status as a feature code. First the digit must be made undefined as call digit.
NOTE: id = feature identification (number of feature code in the listing
D = default value
* = list all feature codes

17.1 FEATURE ACCESS

Each feature code must be subscriber individually enabled/disabled. Use SVT command SFA (set
feature access). As default, all subscribers have access to a limited number of features. Use the
command LFA (list feature access) and GFA (get feature access) to see the list of disabled and
enabled feature codes.

In a default system, we will list all the features enabled for subscriber 112:

SVT > gfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 112
Feature Access <10,-,69/*> : *
Status <Enabled/Disabled> : e
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
48 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Call Number ID Enabled Feature Access

===============================================
112 10 Call Forward A
13 Call Forward Cancel
15 Call Reply
17 Master Station Programming
18 Programme Distribution
22 Accept/HurryUp/Priority
24 Paging / Call Back
25 All/Group Call Reply
39 Display Number/unit on LED
40 Last Number Redial
41 Call Last Callers
49 Step ProgDist Channel
51 Privacy
55 Absence Registration Time
59 Speed Group Phone Book
SVT >

To enable access to the feature “Call Transfer” (feature ID no. 16) the command SFA is used:

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 112
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 16
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

A new list of enabled features for subscriber 112 will show:

SVT > gfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 112
Feature Access <10,-,69/*> : *
Status <Enabled/Disabled> : e
Call Number ID Enabled Feature Access
===============================================
112 10 Call Forward A
13 Call Forward Cancel
15 Call Reply
16 Call Transfer
17 Master Station Programming
18 Programme Distribution
22 Accept/HurryUp/Priority
24 Paging / Call Back
25 All/Group Call Reply
39 Display Number/unit on LED
40 Last Number Redial
41 Call Last Callers
49 Step ProgDist Channel
51 Privacy
55 Absence Registration Time
59 Speed Group Phone Book
SVT >

17.2 FEATURE COUNTER

In the CB901 system it is possible to log all feature activity. Each feature has a belonging counter that
will indicate every time that a specific feature is used. Totally the system has 106 different counters,

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 49

but some are not yet in use. To reset/clear the counters, the command Set Counter Clear (SCC) is
used. To list the different counter use the commands List Counter (LC) or Get Counter (GC).
In a new default, not used system, all counters are set to zero, like the list below:

SVT > lc
Counter id <1,-,106/*> : *
Stage ID Counter Text Counter
====================================================
1 1 Call Digit [1] 0
2 Call Digit [2] 0
3 Call Digit [3] 0
4 Call Digit [4] 0
5 Call Digit [5] 0
6 Call Digit [6] 0
7 Call Digit [7] 0
8 Call Digit [8] 0
9 Call Digit [9] 0
10 Call Forward A 0
11 Call Forward B 0
12 Call Forward C 0
13 Call Forward Cancel 0
14 Direct Dialling 0
15 Call Reply 0
16 Call Transfer 0
17 Master Station Programming 0
18 Programme Distribution 0
19 SVIM Absent Registration 0
20 SVIM Voice Reminder 0
21 SVIM Voice Mail 0
22 Accept/HurryUp/Priority 0
23 Speed Call 0
24 Paging / Call Back 0
25 All/Group Call Reply 0
26 Visicall Caller Id 0
27 Visicall Message Display 0
28 CAS Logon 0
29 SWAM Voice Group Message 0
30 Pager Alarm 1 0
31 Pager Alarm 2 0
32 CAS Night Transfer 0
33 CAS Direct logon 0
34 CAS Direct logout 0
35 Secretary Transfer 0
36 Secretary Transfer Cancel 0
37 Direct Conference Dialling 0
38 SWAM Delete All Voice Mails 0
39 Display Number/unit on LED 0
40 Last Number Redial 0
41 Call Last Caller 0
42 SWAM System Message 0
43 Remote Dial 0
44 Remote Control 0
45 Call Redirect 0
46 Call Reconnect 0
47 Program PD channel 0
48 Step ProgDist Volume 0
49 Step ProgDist Channel 0
50 Tie Line 0
51 Privacy 0
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
50 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

52 Local Door Access 0

53 Remote Door Access 0
54 Personal Door Access 0
55 Absence Registration Time 0
56 Absence Registration Date 0
57 Message Display TX 0
58 Message Display RX 0
59 Speed Group Phone Book 0
60 Remote Display 0
61 CAS Local Reset 0
62 Program PDIC member 0
63 Selective Group Call 0
64 Forced Programme Dist. 0
65 Privacy Call Request 0
66 Direct Unit Call 0
67 Free Seating 0
68 Silent Request 0
69 Time Zone Adjust 0
70 CAS request 0
71 Not Used 0
72 Not Used 0
73 Not Used 0
74 Not Used 0
75 Not Used 0
76 Not Used 0
77 Not Used 0
78 Not Used 0
79 Not Used 0
80 Not Used 0
81 Not Used 0
82 Not Used 0
83 Not Used 0
84 Not Used 0
85 Not Used 0
86 Not Used 0
87 Not Used 0
88 Not Used 0
89 Not Used 0
90 Not Used 0
91 Not Used 0
92 Not Used 0
93 Not Used 0
94 Not Used 0
95 Not Used 0
96 Not Used 0
97 Not Used 0
98 Not Used 0
99 Not Used 0
100 Subscriber Call 0
101 CAS Call 0
102 All Call 0
103 Group Call 0
104 PDGC Call 0
105 LPDGC Call 0
106 PDIC Call 0

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 51

After using the system for some time, the command Get Counter can be used to see all feature
activity.

SVT > gc
Counter id <1,-,106/*> : *
Stage ID Counter Text Counter
====================================================
1 1 Call Digit [1] 13
18 Programme Distribution 8
51 Privacy 6
100 Subscriber Call 12

Features not used will not be listed by the GC command.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
52 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

18. CALL NUMBER WITHOUT PAGING DATA.

The following SVT commands are used to list and change subscriber call number in systems without
pocket paging:
LCN = list call number
LCNC = list call number continuously
LCNU = list undefined call number
LLE = list line equipment
LLEC = list line equipment continuously
LLEU = list undefined line equipment positions
SCN = set call number
SCNU = set call number undefined

Regarding commands ending with "continuously"; these should be used when listing on a printer
(Silent 700), or saving to a file in a PC.
All other commands should be used when listing on a video display unit (Ampex 230 or PC). One
page will cover the screen.

Both PARAMETER PROMPTING and IN-LINE format can be used for most set and list commands.
Some special characters can be used to simplify the execution of the command:
- (minus) : delimiter between lower and upper call number
, (comma) : delimiter between two call numbers
* (star) : all call numbers in the system

Each line equipment position in the central has a default (standard) call number. The call number can
be 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 digit long depending of the switch setting of switch group U19 on Timing Control
Card NFE 1606, (see chapter 2, Switch group U19). In this manual all examples are illustrated with 3
digits call number.

To list call number 109 and 120:

SVT > lcn

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 109,120
Call Number Line Equ. Stage
=================================
109 $09 1
120 $14 1

NOTE: Undefined call numbers will not be listed with the commands LCN or LCNC. Use the
commands LCNU, LLEU or LLEUC.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 53

List subscriber call number 100 to 110 and 135 to 140.

SVT > lcn

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-110,135-140
Call Number Line Equ. Stage
=================================
100 $00 1
101 $01 1
102 $02 1
103 $03 1
104 $04 1
105 $05 1
106 $06 1
107 $07 1
108 $08 1
109 $09 1
110 $0a 1
135 $23 1
136 $24 1
137 $25 1
138 $26 1
139 $27 1
140 $28 1
SVT >

The command SCNU is used to set a call number undefined. When a line equipment position is not
given any call number, a station connected to this position cannot receive, but only initiate calls. No
call number data can be programmed to a undefined number, (device type, privilege type e.t.c).

Make call numbers between 100 and 105 undefined:

SVT > scnu

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-105
SVT >

List undefined number the command LCNU is used:

SVT > lcnu

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-150
Undefined Call Number
=====================
100
101
102
103
104
105

This LCNU command is very important to the service technician, to find free available call numbers in
the system for further later expansion of stations.

To find free available line equipment positions in the system, free for termination of new stations (call
numbers), the command LLEU is used:
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
54 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SVT > lleu

Line Equipment Position <$0,-,$fe/*> : *
Stage Line Equ.
==================
1 $00
1 $01
1 $02
1 $03
1 $04
1 $05
If the customer requires a special intercom call number sequence, a reconfiguration of the call
number is necessary. Often the CB901's call numbers should correspond to the in-house telephone
numbering.

By using the command SCN, a line position can be given any call number.

Example:
Station connected to line equipment position $0C has the call number 112 in the standard program
(as default call number). We want to have call number 120 on this position:

SVT > scn

Call Number <100,-,999> : 120
Line Equipment <$0..$fe> : 0c
SVT >

A listing of call numbers with LCN command will display the changing of call number 120. It is now
programmed to position $0C. Station 112 is now undefined together with the numbers100-105.
Using the command LCNU will list the undefined call numbers:

SVT > lcnu

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-150
Undefined Call Number
=====================
100
101
102
103
104
105
112
SVT >

The SCN command is also used to replace a range of call numbers. Use the procedure given in this
example.
If the old call numbers are not undefined with the command SCNU, they will automatically be so when
the new range of numbers are programmed with the command SCN.

Example; Call numbers 100 - 150 (line equip. pos. $00 - $32) shall be replaced with call nos. 250-300.
SVT > scn
Call Number <100,-,999> : 250-300
Start at Line Equipment <$0..$fe> : 0
Typing the first line equipment position only will program the numbers continuously from line
equipment position $00 and up.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 55

19. CALL NUMBER WITH PAGING DATA.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

LCNP = list call number with paging data

LCNPC = list call number with paging data continuously
LDPD = list default paging data
LPN = list pager number
LPRT = list paging reply time
LPPD = list pre-programmed pager data
LSPPD = list system pre-programmed pager data
LPAN = list pager alarm number
LPT = list privilege type
SCNP = set call number with paging data
SPN = set pager number
SPND = set paging number default
SPRT = set paging reply time
SDPD = set default paging data
SPPD = set pre-programmed pager data
SSPPD = set system pre-programmed pager data
SCID = set caller identification
SPAN = set pager alarm number
SPT = set privilege type
SFC = set feature code

The Paging feature can operate in combination with many of the other features in the CB901 central.
The purpose of this feature is to transmit information to a radio paging system, including text
that can be written in the display of a pocket receiver.
The information can be transmitted directly when a specific number is called, or after some action in
the calling station. The pager number can be from 1 to 5 digits, depending on the connected paging
system.

Via SVT a paging answering time can be programmed for each subscriber, Call Reply Time. If the
paging receiver has no display, then this answering time must be programmed. If the paging receiver
has a display, then this answering time is normally set to zero (default).
The paging channel is therefore cleared immediately after transmission of the paging information.
The answering time can be programmed from 1 to 12 minutes.
One paging channel will be busy for each paging call, during the "wait for paging answer" period.
If the page call is not answered within the programmed wait period, then the page call is automatically
erased from memory.
The system has 10 paging channels, thus accepting 10 simultaneous pocket page calls.
The paged person must go to the nearest master station and dial 8 plus his own call number. A
connection will then automatically be established between the station that made the page call, and the
station from which the page call was answered.

The following main paging features can be activated:

A:Beep only in receivers without display.

The called person must answer back to the calling station by dialling 8 plus own station
number, from any master station.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
56 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

B: Initiators call number in receivers display.

To activate paging, cancel the call with 8. A pre-programmed bleep tone is heard in the
receiver and the caller's call-number is displayed. No pre-programmed data is entered by the
commands SCID.

C: Pre-programmed individual message for initiator, in receivers display.

Each subscriber can be programmed to transmit a prefix message to the called person's
pager. This message (alpha numeric) will be displayed instead of the caller's call-number.
To pre-program the message, the command SCID is used.

D: Pre-programmed system message in the receivers display.

In addition to one of the above features, a subscriber can transmit a pre-programmed system
message to the person's pager. 10 different system messages (alpha numeric) are available
(0-9). To pre-program this system message, the command SSPPD is used. To activate such
type of paging, cancel the established call with 8 followed by the number (0-9) indicating the
required system message. In addition, digits dialled on the intercom station's keypad will be
added to the end of the selected system message.

E: Using the feature Dummy Call Number with Auto Paging to send individual
messages to receivers display.
Calling a Dummy Call Number will always result in Auto Page.
1. If a page code has been programmed to the Dummy Call number, whatever information
related to the initiator and to the dummy number (SPPD) will be displayed in the paged
receiver, < initiator info. > <dummy number info. >.
2. If no page code has been programmed to the Dummy Call number, whatever information
related to the initiator and to the dummy number (SCID) will be displayed in the initiator's
receiver, < initiator info.> <dummy number info.>.

F: Pager Alarms.
The system has two pager alarms, and when a subscriber has the pager alarm privilege and
dials the feature code for a pager alarm, then a pager output to a receiver is made.
Use the command SPAN to program pager data to the pager alarm.

The ESPA paging protocol is used for communication with the paging equipment. When a string of
text is programmed for a station, then this string must always start with 4 digits, which are control data
for the paging system. These 4 digits are programmed via the command SPPD (Set Pre-programmed
Paging Data), for single stations.
The string of text is programmed via the command SCID (set caller id.)
If no pre-programmed "ID TEXT" is programmed, then the initiators call number will be displayed.

10 strings can also be programmed for the whole system by the command SSPPD (Set
System Pre-programmed Paging Data), and this string can be selected by pressing a digit from 0 to 9,
after the 8 digit.
If one of the above 10 strings of text is selected, then the string programmed by the command SCID
will not be displayed.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 57

19.1 SDPD (Set Default Paging Data)

NOTE: To implement the following information/features with Scanpager, the software on the interface
card HK 160 MUST be ESPXXA01 (or later). This follows the ESPA protocol.

Some parameters may be programmed to the system generally (command SDPD) which will be valid
for all call numbers. These are:
- paging prefix number (ex CODE 10 for Scanpager)
- default paging reply time (0-15 min)
- beep coding (10 different tones)
- call type (10 different types)
- number of transmissions (up to 10)
- priority (10 different types)
- re-transmissions handled (external/internal)

(Program the system wide paging parameters first, then the individual call number parameters)

The general system parameters programmed with the command SPPD (set pre-programmed paging
data).
The different parameters:

Paging prefix number:

A paging receiver operates by a identity code. Scanpager always needs a 5 digit code. In a system
with 3 digit call number the prefix paging number to program is 2. Often the prefix code in Scanpager
Maxi systems (HK 186/187) is 10 (CODE 10 in Scanpager terminals display).

Default paging reply time:

When a person is paged (with bleep only), he has the possibility to reply back to the initiator by
pressing a feature code on any station. The default feature code for reply to paging is 8. To program
the default paging reply time use the command SDPD. Individual paging reply time for each call
number can be programmed with the command SPRT.

Beep coding:
Programming up to 10 different alert tones (0-9). The recommended tone type for Scanpager is 1.

Call type:
Programming up to different paging modes. Use mode 3 (standard) for Scanpager.

Number of transmissions:
A pager transmission can be repeated up to 10 times. Use 1 for Scanpager.

Priority:
10 different priority levels may be programmed. Use 3 (normal) for Scanpager.

Re-transmission:
Paging re-transmission (SDPD or SPPD) can be controlled either internally by CB 901 or externally
by the paging equipment (default). Use internal when paging equipment does not accept ESPA
cancel message (Scanpager HK 160).

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
58 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Example: Our CB 901 system is interfaced to Scanpager Maxi paging encoder.

The following default paging data is required on the system:
- prefix paging number should be '10'
- default paging tine 3 min
- beep coding 1
- standard call type, 3
- 1 transmission
- normal priority, 3
SVT > sdpd
Paging Prefix (Undef) <1..9999/D/U> : 10
Default Paging Reply Time [min] (0) <0..15/D/U> : 3
Beep Coding (0) <0..9/D/U> : 1
Call Type (3) <0..9/D/U> : 3
Number of Transmissions (1) <0..9/D/U> : 1
Priority (3) <0..9/D/U> : 3
Re-transmission Handled (External) <E/I/D> : i
SVT >
NOTE: If a text message should be displayed in the receiver, this text string must be programmed
with the command SCID (Set Call number ID). This is the same text that will be displayed in the
Display of Master Station AA960.

19.2 SCNP (set call number with paging data).

This command is used if both the call number and paging data should be reconfigured.

Example;
Station connected to line equipment position $00 has the call number 100 in the standard program (as
default call number). We want to have call number 110 on this position with the paging number
10333. Call number 110 should operate with default paging time which is already programmed to 3
min.

SVT > scnp

Call Number <100,-999> : 110
Line Equipment <$0..$fe> : 0
Page Number <1..99999/D> : 10333
Paging Reply Time [min] <0..15/D> : d
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 59

19.3 SPN (set pager number) and SPRT (set paging reply time)

This command is used to define a pager number and pager reply time for an existing call number.

Example;
The station connected to line equipment position $07 has the call number 107 in the standard
program (as default call number). We want to add pager number 444 to his position.

SVT > spn

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 107
Pager Number <1..99999/D> : 444
SVT >

Call number 107 should operate with paging time 2 min (the default paging time is already
programmed to 3 min.

SVT > sprt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 107
Paging Reply Time [min] <0..15/D> : 2
SVT >

The SCNP command is also used to replace a range of call numbers with corresponding pager
numbers. Use the procedure given in this example.

Example;
Call numbers 100 - 150 (line equip. pos. $00 - $32) shall be replaced with call nos. 250-300. The
pager numbers should be in sequence from 10000 to 10050.
The paging reply time is set to 3 min.

SVT > scnp

Call Number <100,-,999> : 250-300
Start at Line Equipment <$0..$fe> : 0
Pager Number <1..99999/D> : 10000
Paging Reply Time [min] <0..15/D> : 3
SVT >

Typing the first line equipment position only will program the call and pager numbers continuously
from line equipment position $00 and up.

NOTE:
If the pager numbers should correspond to the call numbers remember to program "default" (D) for
the pager number.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
60 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

19.4 SPND (set paging number/paging reply time default).

This command is used to set one or a range of call numbers with a default paging number and default
paging reply time.
The default paging number is the same number as the call number plus eventually the prefix set by
the SDPD.
The default paging reply time is the same as the figure defined in the command SDPD.

Ex.; call number 103 will have default paging number 103, call number 104 will have default paging
number 104.

A range of call numbers can be programmed with default paging number, call numbers 120 to 130.

SVT > spnd

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 120-130

19.5 SPPD (Set Pre-programmed Paging Data).

This command is used to pre-program individual subscribers to be able to transmit individual data
when activating paging. This command overrides the default system data programmed by the
command SDPD.

If a text message should be displayed in the receiver, this text string must be programmed with the
command SCID (Set Call number ID). This is the same text that will be displayed in the Display
Master Station AA960.

- digit 1 :beep coding (10 different tones 0-9). Use 1 for Scanpager
- digit 2 :call type (10 different tones 0-9). Use 3 for Scanpager
- digit 3 :number of transmissions (up to 10, 0-9).Use 1 for Scanpager
- digit 4 :priority (10 different tones 0-9). Use 3 for Scanpager

Ex: The call number 107 should be programmed to page on a Scanpager system.

SVT > sppd

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 107
Beep Coding (0) <0..14/D/U> : 1
Call Type (3) <0..9/D/U> : 3
Number of Transmissions (1) <0..9/D/U> : 1
Priority (3) <0..9/D/U> : 3
SVT >

To list the pre-programmed pager data, the command LPPD is used.

SVT > lppd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 107
Call Beep Call Number of
Number Code Type Transmissions Priority
===============================================
107 1 3 1 3
SVT >

19.6 SSPPD (Set System Pre-programmed Paging Data)

In addition to one of the above features (default paging data SDPD or individual paging data SPPD),
a subscriber can transmit a pre-programmed system message to the called persons pager. 10

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 61

different system messages (alpha numeric) are available (0-9). To pre-program this system
message, the command SSPPD is used.

To activate such type of paging, cancel the established call with 8 followed by the number (0-9)
(within a pre-programmed time) indicating the required system message, 0-9. In addition, digits
dialled on the intercom station's keypad will be added to the end of the selected system message.
Use the command ST (set time) to define the time interval between press of '8' and the additional
message number (0-9). In the ST command, the id no 2 'accept tone wait optional data' should be
used, The default time is 2 sec.

Max 23 characters, (4 for ESPA protocol information and 19 for display information) can be
transmitted to the page encoder in each of the system messages, (message 0-9).
19 characters includes both the pre-programmed message and the additional dialled digits from the
keypad.

- digit 1 :beep coding (10 different tones 0-9). Use 1 for Scanpager
- digit 2 :call type (10 different tones 0-9). Use 3 for Scanpager
- digit 3 :number of transmissions(up to 10, 0-9) Use 1 for Scanpager
- digit 4 :priority (10 different tones 0-9) Use 3 for Scanpager
- digit 5 to 23 :display message (max 23 characters incl digits dialled from the keypad)

Ex the following system paging message should be programmed:

- message 0 - 'TRUCK AT MAIN GATE'
- message 1 - 'CALL INTERCOM NO. ..'

The command LSPPD is used to list the programmed system messages.

SVT > ssppd

Pager Message <0..9> : 0
Beep Coding (0) <0..9/D/U> : 1
Call Type (3) <0..9/D/U> : 3
Number of Transmissions (1) <0..9/D/U> : 1
Priority (3) <0..9/D/U> : 3
Display Message Prefix (Undef) (Max 16 char) : "TRUCK AT GATE5"
SVT >

SVT > lsppd 0

Pager Beep Call Number of
Message Code Type Transmissions Priority Pager Display Message
===============================================================
0 1 3 1 3 "TRUCK AT GATE5"

19.7 Calling a normal station and sending the paging automatically.

Two different privileges can be used to give automatically paging of the called station.

A-Subscriber Always Page (privilege no. 10).

When a call number is given this privilege, all calls made from this station will always result in a
paging call.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
62 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

B-Subscriber Always Page (privilege no. 25).

When a call number is given this privilege, all calls made to this station will always result in a paging
call.

Program via SVT in IN-LINE format:

Call from station number 100 shall always activate paging

SVT > spt 100 10

Call to station 101 shall always activate paging output.

SVT > spt 101 25

The information to the pager will be now be transmitted at the same time the connection is
established.

19.8 Calling a Dummy Number with Auto Paging.

Station 100 is calling 200, which is a dummy call number, (see chapter 39 for details)

Note:
The system has a capacity of 10 dummy call numbers in each CB901 stage, in addition to the
normal 240 subscribers. A call to a Dummy Call number will always result in Auto Paging, if a page
code has been programmed to the Dummy Call number.
Subscribers defined as device N (none) will also be treated as a dummy number.
Device None will however occupy one subscriber position.
The central will respond with an accept tone, and cancel the connection immediately.
Information related to the initiator, will be displayed in the paging receiver.

A. Caller's call-number in display.

SVT > sdcn 200
SVT > spn 200 10200

The caller's call-number (100) is displayed if no CALLER ID is programmed with the command SCID.

B. Call number ID in display.

SVT > scid
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Call ID Text (Max 8 char) : "MARTIN H"
Insert Period in Call ID Text ? (Y/N) : n
SVT >

Calling the dummy call number (200), the text Martin H is displayed instead of the call number.

C. Calling different dummy numbers with different programmed paging messages.

The message to be displayed in the same receiver.

Station 100 calling dummy number 200, the message ROOM 1-HELP is displayed.
The same station 100 is calling dummy number 300, the message ROOM 2-HELP is displayed.
Both messages is displayed in receiver no. 10111.
SVT > sdcn 200
SVT > sdcn 300
SVT > spn 200 10111
SVT > spn 300 10111

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 63

SVT > scid 200 ¨ROOM1-¨ n

SVT > scid 300 ¨ROOM2-¨ n
SVT > scid 100 ¨HELP¨ n
SVT > spt 100 8 +

D. Calling a dummy number, from different stations with different programmed paging messages to
the same receiver.

Station 100 calling dummy number 200, the message ALARM-ROOM10 is displayed.
Station 101 calling dummy number 200, the message ALARM-ROOM11 is displayed.
Both messages is displayed in receiver no. 10111.
SVT > sdcn 200
SVT > spn 200 10111
SVT > scid 100 ¨ROOM10¨ n
SVT > scid 101 ¨ROOM11¨ n
SVT > scid 200 ¨ALARM-¨ n
SVT > spt 100,101 8 =

19.9 Pager Alarm. (SPAN = set pager alarm number)

From master stations given access to feature no. 30 (pager alarm) an alarm page can be activated.
When the subscriber dials the feature code for pager alarm then a pager output to a receiver is made.
If the person has defined pre-programmed pager data (SPPD) then this data (exclusive of the 4 first
characters, bleep, call type, number of transmission & priority) is added to the Pager Alarm Display
Prefix. This is added instead of the call number.

The programming sequence is:

- use SPAN to define the page receiver number (i.e.; a group call in Scanpager
- use SFC (id no 30) to define the alarm code 500 (the default feature code to dial to activate the
alarm is 930)
The data to programme are:

- digit 1 :beep coding (10 different tones 0-9) Use 1 for Scanpager
- digit 2 :call type (10 different tones 0-9) Use 3 for Scanpager
- digit 3 :number of transmissions(up to 10, 0-9) Use 1 for Scanpager
- digit 4 :priority (10 different tones 0-9) Use 3 for Scanpager
- digit 5 to 12 :display message (max 8 characters)

If pre-programmed pager data is required:

- use SPPD to define pre-programmed pager data
- use SFA to get access to the Pager Alarm 1 and Pager Alarm 2
- use SCID to identify the calling station.

The system has two Pager Alarms; no 1 and no 2.

Ex., Subscriber no. 140 wants to activate the alarm page no.1 to receiver 10555. The message in the
display should be: "6666", and call number (pager alarm no 1 feature code) should be 500.

Call digit 5 has to be undefined (as first digit in call number) with the command SCDU.

The programming sequence will be:

SVT > scdu
Call Digit <1..9> : 5

SVT > span

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
64 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Pager Alarm <1..2> : 1

Pager Number (Undef) <1..99999/U> : 10555
Beep Coding (0) <0..9/D> : 0
Call Type (3) <0..9/D> : 3
Number of Transmissions (1) <0..9/D> : 1
Priority (3) <0..9/D> : 3
Display Message Prefix (Undef) (Max 8 char) : 6666

SVT > sfc

Feature id <10..67> : 30
Feature Code Pager Alarm 1 (930) <0..999999/D/U> : 500

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 140
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 30
Operation <+/-/=> : +

Note:
The Pager Alarm no 2 has a special function. If the initiator (A-subscriber) has programmed Direct
Access (privilege type '15') to a CAS number, the pager number of this CAS number is activated
instead of the Pager Alarm no 2.

In the command SPT (Set Privilege Type), the Operation <+/-/=> : indicates:
+ ; add specified privilege type to existing privilege data
- ; remove specified privilege type from existing privilege data
= ; assign specified privilege type (existing data will be deleted)

19.10 DIFFERENT COMMANDS CAN BE USED TO LIST PAGING DATA:

19.10.1 LCNP (list call number with paging data).

To list call numbers with paging data the commands LCNP is used. This listing will display all relevant
information for the call number;
- line equipment position
- stage no.
- pager no.
- paging reply time

A list of call numbers in the range of 100 to 130 will be,(in IN-LINE format):

NOTE. ONLY call numbers with paging data will be listed. Use command LPN (next page) where also
call numbers without paging will be listed as undefined. For call numbers without paging data also use
command LCN.

SVT > lcnp

Call Number <100,-,999/♦> : 100-135
Call Number Line Equ Stage Pager Number Paging Reply Time
===========================================================================
107 $07 1 444 2

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 65

110 $00 1 333 3

120 $14 1 10120 3
121 $15 1 10121 3
122 $16 1 10122 3
123 $17 1 10123 3
124 $18 1 10124 3
125 $19 1 10125 3
126 $1a 1 10126 3
127 $1b 1 10127 3
128 $1c 1 10128 3
129 $1d 1 10129 3
130 $1e 1 10130 3
SVT >
19.10.2 LPN (list pager number).

This command lists paging number against call number. For example, list paging nos. corresponding
to call numbers 105 to 110, 118 and 125.

SVT > LPN

Call Number <100,-,999/♦> : 105-110,118-128
Call Number Pager Number
================================
107 444
110 333
120 10120
121 10121
122 10122
123 10123
124 10124
125 10125
126 10126
127 10127
128 10128
SVT >

19.10.3 LPRT (list paging reply time)

This command lists paging time against call number. For example, list paging reply time for call
numbers 105 to 110, 118 and 125:

SVT > LPRT

Call Number <100,-,999/♦> : 105-110,118-128
Call Number Paging Reply Time
=====================================
107 2
110 2
120 3
121 3
122 3
123 3
124 3
125 3
126 3
127 3
128 3

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
66 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

19.10.4 LDPD (list default paging data).

This command lists the system default paging prefix number and time.

SVT > ldpd

Prefix Pager Number : 10
Default Paging Reply Time : 3
Beep Coding : 1
Call Type : 3
Number of Transmissions : 1
Priority : 3
Re-transmission Handled : Internally
SVT >
19.10.5 LPPD (list pre-programmed pager data)

This command lists the pre-programmed pager data:

SVT > lppd

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 107
Call Beep Call Number of Priority
Number Code Type Transmissions
============================================
107 1 3 1 3
SVT >

19.10.6 LSPPD (List System Pre-programmed Paging Data)

The command lists the pre-programmed system data.

SVT > lsppd

Pager Message <0,-,9/*> : 0
Pager Message System Pre-programmed Pager Data
=======================================================
0 1313TRUCK AT MAIN GATE

19.10.7 LPAN (list pager alarm number)

This command lists the receiver related to the pager alarm number no. 1 or 2:

SVT > lpan

Pager Alarm 1 2
Pager Number: 10555 Undef
Beep Coding: 0 0
Call Type: 3 3
Transmissions: 1 1
Priority: 3 3
Message Prefix: 6666 Undef
SVT >
20. CALL NUMBER, DEVICE TYPE.
The following SVT commands are used for programming / listing device types:
SDT = set device type
LDT = list device type
GDT = get device type

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 67

HDT = help device type

A call number can be given one of the following device types:

1 - Station type: AA903, AA904, AA905.. (master stations without display)
2 - Station type: AA960, AA961 (master station with display)
3 - Station type: Visicall AE111
4 - Station type: Tie-Line CE921
N - Station type: None (station can not receive calls, dummy call number)

A call number can be programmed with ONE of the above listed device types, use the command
SDT.
Ex.: Station 101 is a Visicall AE111 station, 102 - 110 are display stations AA960 and 111 - 150 are
master stations AA904.

Programming:
SVT > sdt
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 101
Device Type <1..4/N> : 3
SVT > sdt
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 102-110
Device Type <1..4/N> : 2
SVT > sdt
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 111-150
Device Type <1..4/N> : 1

To list call number's device type use the command LDT:

SVT > ldt
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 101,102,120
Call Number Device Type
===============================
101 AE111
102 AA960, AA961
120 AA903, AA904, AA905..
SVT >

To search for a special device type use the command GDT. To search for call numbers with device
type AE111 :
SVT > gdt
Call Number <100,-,999/* : 100-150
Device Type <1,-4/*/N> : 3
Call Number Device Type
===============================
101 AE111
SVT >

21. CALL NUMBER, PRIVILEGE TYPE.

The following SVT commands are used for programming/listing privilege type:

SPT = set privilege type

LPT = list privilege type
GPT = get privilege type
HPT = help privilege type
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
68 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

A call number can be given (enabled/disabled) one or several privilege type(s). As default, no
privileges are enabled. To enable privileges, the command SPT is used. Use the command LPT (list
privilege type) or GPT (get privilege type) to see the list of disabled and enabled privilege types.

1 All Call
2 Group Call
3 Priority
4 SVIM (Listen to other's Personal SVIM Messages)
5 Program Distribution Group Call
6 Local Program Distribution Group Call
7 Program Distribution Input Channel
8 CAS Operator Group Call
9 Disable timer on Direct Dial tone A.(Key F)
10 A-subscriber Always Page
11 Not Used
12 CAS Priority
13 Not Used
14 Privacy Test Line Monitoring
15 Convert (Short) DC-shift to Direct Dial Table Tone C
16 Data Transmission (DTMF)
17 Open Station
18 All Call X-out
19 Not Used
20 Remote Dialling Receive
21 Hurry Up
22 Convert long DC-shift to Direct Dial Table Tone D
23 Disable DTMF-digit input
24 Display Visicall AE111 Information Automatic
25 CAS Enable Privacy Switch
26 B-subscriber Always Page
27 Combine A and B Subscriber Pager Data
28 Display Additional Call Data on B-subscriber
29 Not Used
30 Not Used
31 Not Used
32 Not Used

A call number can be programmed with any of the above listed privilege types, use the command
SPT.
Station 102 should have access to group call and have priority:

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 102
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 2,3
Operation <+/-/=> : +

IMPORTANT NOTE:
In the command SPT (Set Privilege Type), the Operation <+/-/=> : indicates:

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 69

+ ; add specified privilege type to existing privilege data

- ; remove specified privilege type from existing privilege data
= ; assign specified privilege type (existing privileges will be deleted)

To make a complete list of call number's privilege type programmed to one or several subscribers use
the command LPT, or to just list enabled or disabled privileges use the command GPT.

To search for a special privilege type use the command GPT. To check all call numbers with privilege
type "access to group call" and "priority":

SVT > gpt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : *
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*> : 2,3
Status <Enabled/Disabled> : e
Call Number ID Enabled Privilege Type
===============================================
102 2 Group Call
3 Priority
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
70 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

22. PRIVACY.
The following SVT commands are used for this feature:
SPC = set privacy category
LPC = list privacy category
HPC = help privacy category

The system operates with 2 different privacy ringing modes:

Privacy mode A: Short warning tone on B-side. Ringing tone on A-side.
Privacy mode B: Ringing tone on A and B side.

Using SVT, 5 different privacy categories can be individually programmed to the system users:

Category A:
Privacy mode A; feature depending of the position of the privacy switch (AA903, AA904..) or if feature
code for privacy is activated (AA960). Default feature code is 951 (or F1).

Category AA:
Privacy mode A; in mode ALWAYS. Always in privacy, regardless of the position of the
privacy switch (AA903, AA904..) or if feature code for privacy is activated (AA960). Default feature
code is 951 (or F1).

Category B:
Privacy mode B; feature depending of the position of the privacy switch (AA903, AA904..) or if feature
code for privacy is activated (AA960). Default feature code is 951 (or F1).

Category AB:
Privacy mode B; in mode ALWAYS. Always in privacy, regardless of the position of the
privacy switch (AA903, AA904..) or if feature code for privacy is activated (AA960). Default feature
code is 951 (or F1).

Category N:
Privacy NEVER. The station can never be put in privacy.

The 5 above privacy modes operate as follows:

Privacy mode A: Subscriber B switches his station to privacy. Subscriber A calls B. B hears a short
privacy tone (warbling tone). A hears a longer (about 12 sec) privacy 'ringing tone'. To accept the call
B can press 0-button within 12 sec., A and B get a warning tone and a normal conversation is set-up.
If B does not press 0 within 12 sec. then A is cancelled. When the call is cancelled B remains in
privacy as long as his privacy switch is set on. Privacy A is provided as default in the system.

Privacy mode B: As in mode A except that the tone in both stations is a "ringing tone" (as a telephone
would) which is heard in both stations for about 12 seconds.
Use the command SPC (set privacy category). The default privacy category is A. Stations 100 to 105
should operate with privacy mode B (category B) and stations 106 to 110 always in privacy mode B
(category AB).

The privacy ringing time is controlled by system timer 8, and can be adjusted via the command ST.

NOTE: To program the different categories, please refer to the listing HPC (help privacy category).

SVT > spc

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-105

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 71

Privacy Category <A/B/AA/AB/N> : b

SVT > spc
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 106-110
Privacy Category <A/B/AA/AB/N> : ab
SVT >

To list the different privacy categories use the command LPC:

SVT > lpc
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-110
Call Number Privacy Category
====================================
100 B
101 B
102 B
103 B
104 B
105 B
106 Always B
107 Always B
108 Always B
109 Always B
110 Always B

22.1 Privacy Call Request

A station can be registered as privacy when called from predetermined stations.

Give feature access, Privacy Call Request, to station no.200

SVT > sfa
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 200
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 65
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

Example:
Station no.200 shall make a call to no.150, and dials: 965150

965 Feature code.

150 Receiving stations call number.

Station no.200 will now receive the privacy tone and be camped on to 150.
Useful when dialling from a one button door station, using the direct dialling feature.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
72 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

23. DATA TRANSMISSION (DTMF).

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:
SPT = set privilege type
LPT = list privilege type
GPT = get privilege type
HPT = help privilege type

Allows a subscriber to communicate via DTMF with a device which is driven by DTMF tones (e.g.
remote control devices/decoders etc.)
The user calls the remote control device (which is assigned a call number). Any subsequent key
pressed is transmitted to the receiver. The DTMF transmitter in the station is used and the tone is
transmitted as long as the key is hold down. There is no need to hold down the privacy switch while
pressing the key. The call is cancelled with the X key.

The position of all remote control stations in a system must be programmed with the Service
Terminal, otherwise the system assumes these positions are occupied by a standard intercom station.

The call number for data transmission (station receiving DTMF tones), must be programmed with
privilege no. 16, "data transmission".

Example.
Station 150 is programmed to be a data transmission device.

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 150
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 16
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

1: Station no.100 is calling no.150.

DTMF can be transmitted from 100 to 150.

2: Station no.150 is calling no.100.

DTMF cannot be transmitted from 150 to 100.

3: Station number 150 is calling a CAS group.

CAS operator no.100 accepts the call.
DTMF cannot be transmitted from 100 to 150.
In this case you can keep the number button in station 100 pressed for a time set by timer
no.31 (Wait For Button Release).
The DTMF tone is then transmitted.

Note:
The timer should not be adjusted to minimum, since this will interfere with the normal dialling.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 73

24. SPEED CALL/SPEED GROUP PHONE BOOK.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SSCT = set speed call table

SSCTU = set speed call table undefined
SSCTM = set speed call table multi
SSCG = set speed call group
LSCT = list speed call table
LSCG = list speed call group
GSCG = get speed call group
SFA = set feature access

24.1 SPEED CALL.

To simplify the dialling procedures for frequently used call numbers, the CB901 exchange can be
programmed with abbreviated dialling numbers.

The subscriber dials the feature code for speed call (FC-7) followed by the speed call number. The
default feature code is 723, but this should be changed to a one digit code for easy access. To get
access to this feature, use the command SFA (set feature access).

The subscriber must be a member of a speed call group in order to access the speed call table
(hence the second digit is the only digit used to access the speed call number).

Each system (CB 901 any size) contains max. 32 speed call groups. Each such group contains 32
speed call numbers (1 - 32) for speed dialling by use of the display station’s scroll buttons and 10 (the
first 10 in the table) for use by feature code from station’s numeric keypad (1 - 10) . Note that speed
call number 10 is accessed by key “0”. This can be thought of as an 32 x 32 table whose entries are
subscriber numbers. There can be more than one occurrence of a subscriber number in the table. A
subscriber no. in one stage can be member of a speed call group in another stage.

All speed call numbers must be entered using the Service Terminal, otherwise the feature is disabled.

All stations with access to a speed call table must be programmed with the command SSCG. To
program the table the commands SSCTM or SSCT are used. The command SSCTU is used to
undefine entries in the tables.

24.2 SPEED GROUP PHONE BOOK.

When a display station AA960/AA961 is used, the subscriber can dial a feature code to bring up the
first call number (in the speed call table) in the display. The scroll keys can be used to display all 32
call
numbers (or call ID’s if programmed), one by one, in the display. When the required call number is
displayed, press the F button to dial. A call will be established to the displayed call number. The
default feature code is 759 (or FF). To get access to the feature use the command SFA (set feature
access).

Example; Stations 110 to 115 should all have access to speed call table no. 1. Receivers in this group
are:
station 122 as entry 1
station 133 as entry 2
station 144 as entry 13
station 155 as entry 14
Stations 122 and 133 can be accessed by dialling by the feature code 723 and 1 and 2 respectively
and also be using the Speed Group Phone Book feature (FF plus scroll keys) from a display station.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
74 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Stations 144 and 155 can only be dialled from a display station using the Speed Group Phone Book
feature (FF plus scroll keys).

SVT > sscg

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 110-115
Speed Call Group <1..32/U> : 1

The receiving stations must be programmed into the correct speed call table with the command
SSCTM or SSCT.

SVT > ssctm

Speed Call Table <1,-,32/*> : 1
Entry <1,-,32/*> : 1,2,13,14
Speed Call Number [T:1][E:1] (Undef) <100..999/U/T/Q> : 122
Speed Call Number [T:1][E:2] (Undef) <100..999/U/T/Q> : 133
Speed Call Number [T:1][E:13] (Undef) <100..999/U/T/Q> : 144
Speed Call Number [T:1][E:14] (Undef) <100..999/U/T/Q> : 145
or
SVT > ssct
Speed Call Table <1,-,32/*> : 1
Entry <1..32/*> : 5
Speed Call Number [T:1][E:5] (Undef) <100..999/U> : 147

Explanations:
U The station number is undefined.
T We will go directly to the next table, which is specified in the range.
Q Quit programming.
ENTER Go to next entry in the table without changing

NOTE:
To get access to this feature, the command SFA (set feature access) must be used:

SVT > sfa

Call Number <10,-,99/*> : 110-115
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 23
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

To list the speed call group use command LSCG:

SVT > lscg

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-115
Call Number Speed Call Group
=====================================
100 Undef
101 Undef
102 Undef
103 Undef
104 Undef
105 Undef
106 Undef
107 Undef
108 Undef
109 Undef
110 1
111 1

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 75

112 1
113 1
114 1
115 1

To list the speed call table (the receivers) use command LSCT:

SVT > lsct

Speed Call Table <1,-,32/*> : 1
Group Entry
===========================================================================
1 < 1..8 > 122 133 - - - - - -
< 9..16> - - - - 144 145 - -
<17..24> - - - - - - - -
<25..32> - - - - - - - -
SVT >

To search for call numbers programmed to a certain speed call group use the command GSCG:

SVT > gscg

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-150
Speed Call Group <1,-,32/*> : 1,3,5-10
Call Number Speed Call Group
==================================
110 1
111 1
112 1
113 1
114 1
115 1
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
76 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

25. DIRECT ACCESS STATIONS.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SDDD = set direct dialling data

LDDT = list direct dialling data
SPT = set privilege type

Some sub-stations have a "CALL", (alarm, ring, door etc.) button. By pressing this button a
connection is made to a pre-programmed receiver. No DTMF tones are transmitted from the station,
only a DC polarity shift between lead no. 1 and 2.

Whenever caller A makes a call using the "CALL" button only, then this will always result in a call
request made to B.
This feature applies to "direct access stations" with "CALL" button (e.g. AB 917, AB 918, AB 919,
AB921, AB931, AB931A or specially modified stations).
There is no limitation on the number of direct access stations in the system. There is no limitation on
which other station the call gives access to.

Programming a Direct Access Station.

The command SDDD (set direct dialling data) is used.
“Tone C”. The SDDD command has 3 tables. The table no. 1, Idle, must be used and Tone/Key
Entry no. 12 (tone "C") should be selected. This will make initiative from a Direct Access station. The
station must be programmed with privilege no. 15 (convert DC-shift to Direct Dial Table Tone C).
“Tone D”: Tone/Key Entry no. 13 (tone “D”) can also be used. The central will detect the length of the
“closing contact”, if the time is shorter then 500ms this will be detected as tone C and longer will be
tone D. 500 ms is default, but can be adjusted with System Timer no. 9. See chapter 47.
In this case when tone D is to be selected, the station must be programmed with privilege no. 22
(convert DC-shift to Direct Dial Table Tone D).
For more information, see paragraph 26, DIRECT DIALLING.

NOTE:
Both Tone/Key entry no. 12 (tone C) and 13 (tone D) can be programmed for the same station. This
way the station can call two different (or the same) call number by use of the Direct Access feature
(DC-shift). Both privilege 15 and 22 must be programmed.

IMPORTANT.
When only detection of DC-shift is required (no DTMF tones) it is important to disable the DTMF
receiver in the central to prevent accidental decoding of DTMF frequency combinations. The station
must be programmed with the privilege no. 23, Disable DTMF-digit input.

EXAMPLE:
Direct Access station AB 917 (with call number 105) is to be programmed with direct access to call
number 115.

SVT > sddd

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105
Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 1
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 12
Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 115
SVT >
Call number 105 must be programmed with the privilege no. 15 (convert DC-shift to Direct Dial Table
Tone C).

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 77

Use the command SPT, (see CALL NUMBER, PRIVILEGE TYPE):

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 15
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

In the command SPT (Set Privilege Type), the Operation <+/-/=> : indicates:
+ ; add specified privilege type to existing privilege data
- ; remove specified privilege type from existing privilege data
= ; assign specified privilege type (existing data will be deleted)

If a direct access CALL from station 105 should also result in page call, use the command SPT, (see
CALL NUMBER, PRIVILEGE TYPE), and program station 105 with the privilege type no.10
(A-subscriber Always Page).

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 10
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

To list the receiver for the direct access station 105, use the command LDDD (list direct dialling data).
SVT > lddd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 12
Direct Dial Data for Call Number 105
Table 1 Idle Table 2 Duplex Table 3 Extended
Tone C or Rem.I/P Off: 115 - -

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
78 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

26. DIRECT DIALLING

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SFC = set feature code, id. no. 14, "direct dialling". To enable programming of direct
dialling data from a master station. If this feature-code is undefined, all
programming direct dialling data must be done from SVT, (SDDD
command).
SST = set subscriber time, id. no. 3, "direct dial activate", time between first and
second digit, default is 1.2 sec.
ST = set time, id. no. 28, "direct dial pause", pause between two digits, prompt
"P" in command SDDD.
SSDDD = set system direct dialling data
SDDD = set direct dialling data
LSDDD = list system direct dialling dada
LDDD = list direct dialling data

All operation involving the F key is of course only valid for the display station.

It is possible to program keys 0-9,F and * of master station's keypad to dial frequently called numbers
(call numbers or feature codes) with one keystroke.

The CB901 system has two direct dialling data sections:

- system section, valid for all subscribers in the system.
- individual section, valid for individual subscriber and overrides the system section.

Each section has three tables:

- table 1, Idle: Valid for keys 0-9,F and * and will operate from station in idle.
- table 2, Duplex: Valid for keys 0-9,F and * and will operate when a call is established.
- table 3, Extended: Valid for key F plus key 0-9,F and * and will operate from station in idle.

When a station is in idle, and a programmed key is pressed, a dial tone is heard as normal. If no other
key is pressed within 0.8 seconds (programmable with command SST, timer no.3 ), then the
programmed data (in table 1, Idle) is automatically dialled. If a second key is pressed within 0.8
seconds then a normal dial sequence can take place.

When a station is in a duplex conversation, and a programmed key is pressed, a dial tone is heard as
normal. If no other key is pressed within 0.8 seconds (programmable with command SST, timer no.
3), then the programmed data (in table 2, Duplex) is automatically dialled. If a second key is pressed
within 0.8 second then a normal dial sequence can take place.

When a station is in idle, and key F plus a programmed key is pressed, a dial tone is heard as normal.
If no other key is pressed within 0.8 seconds (programmable with command SST, timer no. 3 ), then
the programmed data (in table 3, Extended) is automatically dialled. If a second key is pressed within
0.8 second then a normal dial sequence can take place.

Programming of the direct dialling data, related to the different keys (0-9), is made by the station itself
or from SVT.
There is no limit to the number of stations in a system programmed to this feature.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 79

26.1 Programming the Direct Dialling Data from the master stations' keypad:

The System Direct Dialling Data section can not be programmed/changed from a station's keypad,
SSDDD.
For Individual Direct Dialling Data, tables no 1 (Idle) and table no. 3 (Extended) can be
programmed/changed from the master stations' keypad. Table no. 2 (Duplex) requires programming
from the SVT, SDDD.

On the stations keyboard, do the following programming:

dial the feature code + table no. + key no. + data + X

Note that it is possible to programme any combination of digits and pauses. There are a maximum of
16 digits per key. Pause and X count as one digit.

931 + table no. + key + digits + X - to program

931 + table no. + key + X + timeout - to cancel a key
931 + table no. + key + digits + XX - to abort programming

XO - to programme an "X" (same as # on telephone)

X9 - to program a 1 second pause (programmable with ST command, id. no. 28.

Examples:

931 1 7 120X - 931 is feature code

- 1 is the table no. 1
- 7 is key no.
- 120 call number
- X end of programming string

931 1 7 X - delete direct dialling on key 7

931 1 1 105 X9 106X - key 1 dials a 3-party conference.

(X9 is a pause needed while listening to
the first warning tone).

Note that the feature code 931 is pre-programmed in the default System Direct Dialling Data table 3
as F*. Instead of dialling 931, on display stations AA960 the code F* can be dialled to access direct
dialling programming.

The default feature code is 931, but can be changed by the SVT command SFC.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
80 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

26.2 Programming the Direct Dialling Data from the SVT terminal (command SSDDD and
SDDD):

26.2.1 Programming System Direct Dialling Data (SSDDD):

As default, the system has a programmed System Direct Dialling Data section. All subscribers with
Master Station AA916 and Display Station AA960 have access to this direct dialing data. The data is
stored in table 3, Extended, and the default data is the most used feature codes. Dialling F1 will
activate the Privacy feature. Dialling F2 will give Last number redial. For details , please see the
different feature codes. Use the command LFC, (List Feature Codes).
To list the default direct dialling data, use the command LSDDD (List System Direct Dialling Data):
SVT > lsddd
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : *
System Direct Dial Data
Table 1 Idle Table 2 Duplex Table 3 Extended
Tone 0 or Key 0 : - - 955 absent registration
time
Tone 1 or Key 1 : - - 951 privacy
Tone 2 or Key 2 : - - 940 last number redial
Tone 3 or Key 3 : - - 941 call last caller
Tone 4 or Key 4 : - - 915 call reply
Tone 5 or Key 5 : - - 910 call forward
Tone 6 or Key 6 : - - 913 call forward cancel
Tone 7 or Key 7 : - - -
Tone 8 or Key 8 : - - -
Tone 9 or Key 9 : - - 949 step programme dist.
channel
Tone A or Key F : - - 959 display speed group
phone book
Tone B or Key * : - - 914 programming direct
dialling
Tone C or Rem.I/P On : - - -
Tone D or Rem.I/P Off: - - -

The table 1, Idle and table 2, Duplex are empty as default. Both must be programmed via SVT, and
can not be programmed from the stations' keypad.
The System Direct Dialling Data can be changed by the command SSDDD.
In this example, all subscribers will get direct dialling to call number 111 when pressing key 7:
SVT > ssddd
System Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 1
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 7
Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 111

*Note:
Remote I/P OFF requires the following modification in the AA960 station:
Cut strap R19 on the NFE1812 card in the station.

Procedure to check the status of strap R19:

Press the M-button, the T-button and the LEFT SCROLL -button at the same time, when the station
ID text is written in the display of the AA960 station.
You will now read the following information in the display.

<SOFTWARE REVISION> 00
The right ‘ 0 ‘ indicates the status of the R19 strap.
0 = installed. Remote input OFF is DISABLED.
1 = removed. Remote input OFF is ENABLED. ( Press X to reset the display. )

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 81

To list the new updated System Direct Dialling Data table, use the command LSDDD (List System
Direct Dialling Data).
SVT > lsddd
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : *
System Direct Dial Data
Table 1 Idle Table 2 Duplex Table 3 Extended
Tone 0 or Key 0 : - - 955
Tone 1 or Key 1 : - - 951
Tone 2 or Key 2 : - - 940
Tone 3 or Key 3 : - - 941
Tone 4 or Key 4 : - - 915
Tone 5 or Key 5 : - - 910
Tone 6 or Key 6 : - - 913
Tone 7 or Key 7 : 111 - -
Tone 8 or Key 8 : - - -
Tone 9 or Key 9 : - - 949
Tone A or Key F : - - 959
Tone B or Key * : - - 914
Tone C or Rem.I/P On : - - -
Tone D or Rem.I/P Off: - - -

26.2.2 Programming Individual Direct Dialling Data (SDDD):

Each subscriber can be programmed with local Direct Dialling Data with the command SDDD (Set
Direct Dialling Data). Data entered in this tables will override data programmed in the System Direct
Dialling Data tables, programmed with the command SSDDD.

In this example call number 103 want to have direct dialling:

- on key 1, dialling directly to call number 120
- on key 2, dialling directly to call number 130
- on key 3, dialling directly to call number 140
- on key F plus 7, dialling the all call number 400
- on key F plus 8, dialling the music distribution channel no. 4 with top level volume.
SVT > sddd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 1
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 1
Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 120
SVT > sddd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 1
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 2
Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 130
SVT > sddd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 1
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 3
Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 140
SVT > sddd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 3
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 7
Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 400
SVT > sddd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 3
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
82 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 8

Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 9844

To list the Direct Dialling Data for subscriber 103, use the command LDDD (List Direct Dialling Data).
SVT > lddd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : *
Direct Dial Data for Call Number 103
Table 1 Idle Table 2 Duplex Table 3 Extended
Tone 0 or Key 0 : - - -
Tone 1 or Key 1 : 120 - -
Tone 2 or Key 2 : 130 - -
Tone 3 or Key 3 : 140 - -
Tone 4 or Key 4 : - - -
Tone 5 or Key 5 : - - -
Tone 6 or Key 6 : - - -
Tone 7 or Key 7 : - - 400
Tone 8 or Key 8 : - - 9844
Tone 9 or Key 9 : - - -
Tone A or Key F : - - -
Tone B or Key * : - - -
Tone C or Rem.I/P On : - - -
Tone D or Rem.I/P Off: - - -

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 83

27. PRIORITY
The following SVT commands are used for this feature, (see PRIVILEGE):

SPT = set privilege type

LPT = list privilege type
GPT = get privilege type

Stations can be defined as "priority" stations such that they can override a called station which is in
privacy or in duplex, resulting in a duplex connection with the called station.
1. Priority station A calls subscriber B. privacy tone expires, then A and B are connected in a
normal duplex conversation (both A and B get a warning tone).
Connections produced normally (without using "0" option) can be cancelled by other priority
stations. Connections produced by use of priority cannot be B is busy in connection with C. A
receives the busy tone, then dials 0. Station C is cancelled. Stations A and B get a warning
tone and then A and B are connected in a normal duplex conversation. (In the future,
station C will be put on hold, gets a tone and after that, no audio.)
2. Priority station A calls subscriber B. B is in privacy. A gets a privacy tone. If A presses 0
before B can accept (with 0) and before the cancelled by other priority stations (the connection
has "priority status").
The called station will then receive hurry up tone.
There is no limit to the number of priority stations in a system.
Priority stations must be programmed using the Service Terminal (privilege type 3), otherwise no
station has priority.

Priority cannot cancel a conference call or a SVIM feature. Priority cannot cancel a call-connection in
progress.
At any time during a normal call, a connection can obtain a "priority status" when one of the priority
callers presses 0.
To program priority status to a call number the SPT is used. For example, to program call number
103 as a priority station only:

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Privilege Type (1,-,31/*/D> : 3
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT >

To list a call number's privilege the command LPT is used:

SVT > lpt
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 13
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*> : 3
Call Number ID Privilege Type Text Status
==========================================================
103 3 Priority Enabled
SVT >
To search for all call numbers with the priority privilege use the command GPT:
SVT > gpt
Call Number <10,-,99/*> : *
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*> : 3
Status <Enabled/Disabled> : e
Call Number ID Enabled Privilege Type
===============================================
13 3 Priority

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
84 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

28. ALL CALL.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

NOTE: THIS FUNCTION REQUIRES A HIGH CAPACITY POWER SUPPLY

SACN = set all call number

SACNU = set all call number undefined
SPT = set privilege type
SGCM = set group call member (defines the negative group(s) in all call)
LACN = list all call number
LPT = list privilege type
GPT = get privilege type

This feature allows general one way messages to be broadcast to every station in the system. The all
call is initiated by an authorised subscriber dialling the all call number. The all call number must be
within the range of valid subscriber call numbers.

If an all call is cancelled with 8 (instead of X) one answer back can be made to the all call initiator by
dialling 90 (no time limitation). If the initiator presses 90 first then the reply feature is cancelled.
The last station cancelling with 8, will receive the answer with 90.

Any call number can be programmed as access number for the all call. Only pre-programmed
stations in the system have access to the feature, but any call number can be given this possibility.

The duration of the all call is standard limited to 30 seconds, but can be changed with the Service
Terminal. Programming of all call's access code, and stations with all call initiative access is Service
Terminal programmable. There are no default all call number(s). If the feature is not programmed
then this feature is disabled.
It is possible to program "restricted all call". This means that any one group (as in Group Call, next
chapter) can be excluded from the all call ("negative group"). As there are up to 64 groups in the
system then there can be one all call access code per negative group plus one all call access code for
all groups, giving max. of 65 all call access codes for All-Call.

An all call overrides all other calls in the system except alarm channels. Existing calls at the time of
the all call are not cancelled.

Any call number can be programmed to have the privilege 'all call x-out - 18'. A receiver of all call
with this privilege can cancel the incoming all call message by pressing the X-button.

To programme ‘all call x-out’ use the command SPT.

Only one all-call or group-call can be made in the system at the same time.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 85

Example.
The all call access number should be programmed to 400. Only call numbers 100 - 108, 112 shall
have access to all call.
1. Program the all call access code (SACN).
2. Program privilege to all call.

In the SACN command: Group <0..64> : If no negative group is required, then you must specify
group 0. Group 0 indicates that this is a general all call. (The group calls are specified from no. 1 until
no 64.)

SVT > sacn

All Call Number <100..999> : 400
Group <0..64> : 0
SVT >

To program privilege for all call to stations 100 to 108 and 112 use the SPT command:

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-108,112
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 1
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT >
In the command SPT (Set Privilege Type), the Operation <+/-/=> : indicates:
+ ; add specified privilege type to existing privilege data
- ; remove specified privilege type from existing privilege data
= ; assign specified privilege type (existing data will be deleted)

The command LACN is used to list the all call access number (in AC group: 0) and also the call
numbers of the eventually minus groups (AC groups 1-64).

SVT > lacn

Group <0,-,64/*> : 0
=================================
All Call Group All Call Number
=================================
0 400
SVT >

If elimination of all call receivers is required, these are programmed as members of one of the 64
group call groups (1 - 64), see next section in this manual. Then this group is entered in the SACN
command (as a negative group 1 - 64) instead of ‘0’.

Example:
We will use group-call group 2 as a minus group.
All stations programmed as receivers (members) in group 2 will not receive the all-call message.
The All-Call number shall be 444.
SVT > sacn
All Call Number <100..999> : 444
Group <0..64> : 2
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
86 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

To set a all call access number undefined use the SACNU command.

SVT > sacnu

Undefine All Call Number <100,-,999/*> : *
SVT >
Any call number can be programmed to have the privilege 'all call x-out'. A receiver of all call with
this privilege can cancel the incoming all call message by pressing the x-button.
To programme, use the command SPT.
SVT > spt
Call Number <100,-999/*> : 160
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 18
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 87

29. GROUP CALL

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SGCN = set group call number

SGCM = set group call member
SGCMU = set group call member undefined
SPT = set privilege type
LGCN = list group call number
LGCM = list group call members
LGCMN = list group call members numeric
GGCM = get group call members
LPT = list privilege type
SFA = set feature access

This feature allows a subscriber to call a group of stations in the system, with a single access code.
The Access code is a valid call number, programmed via SVT
The group call is initiated by an authorised subscriber dialling the group access code. The connection
is simplex. If group call is cancelled with 8 (instead of X) a receiver can answer back to the group call
initiator by dialling 90 (no time limitation). If the initiator presses 90 first then the reply feature is
cancelled.

The system can have up to 64 group call groups. Any unique call number can be programmed as
access number for the group call. Only pre-programmed stations in the system has access to the
feature, but any call number can be given this possibility. There is no limit on the number of members
in each of the 64 groups, and a call number can be member of all 64 groups.

The default duration of a group call is limited to 30 seconds, but can be changed with the Service
Terminal. Programming of group call access codes, and stations with group call initiative access is
Service Terminal programmable. There are no default group call numbers. If the feature is not
programmed then this feature is disabled.

A group call overrides all other calls in the system except alarm channels, but no existing calls are
cancelled.

There can only be one Group-Call or All-Call at the same time in the system.

Any one of the 64 groups can be a "negative" group in an all call, such that the all-call includes all
subscribers in the system except those who are programmed as Members in the specified group.

Any call number can be programmed to have the privilege 18 'all call x-out ". A receiver of group call
with this privilege can cancel the incoming group call message by pressing the X-button.
to programme, use the command SPT.

In the following example, 3 groups are programmed:

Members of group 1: 100-103, Access code 501

Members of group 2: 104-110, Access code 502
Members of group 3: 100-110, Access code 503
Initiators: 100, 102-105. (privilege "2")

Programming the group call nos., command SGCN:

SVT > sgcn

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
88 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Group Call Number <100..999> : 501

Group <1..64> : 1
SVT > sgcn
Group Call Number <100..999> : 502
Group <1..64> : 2
SVT > sgcn
Group Call Number <100..999> : 503
Group <1..64> : 3
SVT >

Programming the receivers in group call (members), use the SGCM:

SVT > sgcm

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-103
Group Call Member <1,-,64/*> : 1
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT > sgcm
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 104-110
Group Call Member <1,-,64/*> : 2
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT > sgcm
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-110
Group Call Member <1,-,64/*> : 3
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

In the command SGCM (Set Group Call Members), the Operation <+/-/=> : indicates:
+ ; add specified privilege type to existing privilege data
- ; remove specified privilege type from existing privilege data
= ; assign specified privilege type (existing data will be deleted)

To program the call numbers with access to the group call feature, use the SPT (set privilege type).
Program privilege "2" (for access to group call).

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100,102-105
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 2
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

Use the LGCN command to list the group call numbers:

SVT > lgcn

Group <1,-,64/*> : 1-3
=======================================
Group Call Group Group Call Number
=======================================
1 501
2 502
3 503
SVT >

Use the LGCM command to list the different members in the group call:

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 89

SVT > lgcm

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-107
Call Number Group Call Member
===========================================================================
100 < 1-8 , 9-16> G - G - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<17-24,25-32> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<33-40,41-48> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<49-56,57-64> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
101 < 1-8 , 9-16> G - G - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<17-24,25-32> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<33-40,41-48> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<49-56,57-64> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
102 < 1-8 , 9-16> G - G - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<17-24,25-32> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<33-40,41-48> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<49-56,57-64> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
103 < 1-8 , 9-16> G - G - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<17-24,25-32> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<33-40,41-48> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<49-56,57-64> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
104 < 1-8 , 9-16> - G G - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<17-24,25-32> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<33-40,41-48> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<49-56,57-64> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
105 < 1-8 , 9-16> - G G - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<17-24,25-32> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<33-40,41-48> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<49-56,57-64> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
106 < 1-8 , 9-16> - G G - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<17-24,25-32> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<33-40,41-48> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<49-56,57-64> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
107 < 1-8 , 9-16> - G G - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<17-24,25-32> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<33-40,41-48> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
<49-56,57-64> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SVT >
Use the LGCMN to list all the group call members numeric:

SVT > lgcmn

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-107
Call Number Group Call Member
===========================================================================
100 1,3
101 1,3
102 1,3
103 1,3
104 2-3
105 2-3
106 2-3
107 2-3
SVT >

Use the GGCM to search for call numbers dedicated to which group call:

SVT > ggcm

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-110
Group Call Member <1,-,64/*> : 2,5,10-20
Call Number Group Call Member
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
90 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

===========================================================================
104 2-3
105 2-3
106 2-3
107 2-3
108 2-3
109 2-3
110 2-3
SVT >

Use the command SGCNU to program a group call number undefined.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 91

29.1. Selective Group-Call

It is possible to connect different groups together, in order to give one common message to more
than one group at the same time.

To get access to the feature use the command SFA (set feature access).

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-110
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 63
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

The default feature code to make a selective group call is: 963

Example:

We have programmed the following group call numbers:

Group no. 1 has call number: 120
Group no. 2 has call number: 220
Group no. 3 has call number: 250
Group no. 4 has call number: 300

Station no. 100 has been given privilege no. 2 to make Group Call.

Station no. 100 can now make one group call at a time by calling the group call numbers, one at a
time.

Station no. 100 can also make a call to more than one group at the same time by dialling the
following sequence:

9631209632509633000.

963 :Feature code

120 :Call number to group no. 1
963 :Feature code
220 :Call number to group no. 3
963 :Feature code
300 :Call number to group no. 4
0 :Accept and set up the selected group calls
(x :Cancel selected groups)

Maximum all 64 groups can be connected this way.

The selective group call is cancelled by X or 8 as for a normal single group call.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
92 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

30. HUNT
The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SHN = set hunt number

LHN = list hunt number

Each station in the system is allowed one hunt number to which the central automatically hunts if the
station is busy or in privacy. Several stations can thus be linked together, so that the search continues
until a free station is found.

A has a programmed hunt to B. B has a programmed hunt to C. Subscriber D calls A. A is busy or in

privacy. If B is free then a connection to B is made as in a normal call. If B is busy or in privacy, but C
is free then a connection to C is made as a normal call. If all subscribers in the chain are busy or in
privacy then D gets the busy tone/privacy tone as appropriate.

Each call number in the system can have a maximum of one hunt number and there is no restriction
on the hunt number. The search stops after a maximum, of 10 hunts have been made. The search
stops if the hunt return to the caller before 10 hunts have been made.

All members of a hunting chain must be programmed with the Service Terminal, command SHN. If
the feature is not programmed as default, this feature is disabled.

For example, the following is required:

- if station 106 is busy/privacy it should hunt to no 109,

- if station 109 is busy/privacy it should hunt to no 111.

Use the command SHN:

SVT > shn

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 106
Hunt Number <100..999/U> : 109
SVT > shn
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 109
Hunt Number <100..999/U> : 111
SVT >

To list use the LHN command:

SVT > lhn

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 106,109
Call Number Hunt Number
===============================
106 109
109 111
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 93

31. CONFERENCE.
The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SCP = set conference participants

LCP = list conference participants

Bringing in one at a time, anyone can dial up a number of extensions to initiate a conference call.
The number of participants can be programmed with SVT; the default is 5.

Subscriber A dials B and a connection is established. A then dials C and a 3-party conference is
established. A can similarly dial up to 2 more subscribers.
The conference can proceed either in hands free or confidential mode, and the called extensions can
freely leave the conference at any time.
Only the initiator of a conference can bring in new members to the conference (not the receivers).
The initiator can disconnect the last called extension by pressing X once. Other calls in the
conference can be disconnected by pressing X once more, although this will only disconnect the next
last called extension. Pressing X twice within 1 second cancels the complete conference call.
Any called extension may freely leave the conference call by pressing X. When anyone is leaving the
conference, the remaining stations will hear a warning tone.
All stations can set up a conference. A maximum of 8 conference calls can take place simultaneously
or limited to the link capacity (30 time-slots) or to the 8 inter-links between stages.

A priority station cannot cancel a member of a conference call.

If all stations in a conference call are used in confidential mode, the call is still in voice switching
mode (not in full duplex as in a ordinary call).
If any of the conference parties uses the T-button for Simplex mode (or to interrupt a conversation
between two others), this station will be heard by all the others. When the T-button is released, the
conference goes automatically back to duplex.
A conference participant will only use one time-slot. A 5-party conference call will use 5 time-slots.
The feature is enabled/disabled from the Service Terminal. The maximum number of participants in a
conference (3 - 30) is terminal programmable.

Reference is also made to the feature DIRECT CONFERENCE DIALLING.

Use the command SCP to program the number of participants to the conference feature. The default
setting is 5 participants.

Example:
If 10 is required then program the following:
SVT > scp
Conference Participants (5) <2..30/D> : 10
SVT >

To list the number of participants use the command LCP:

SVT > lcp
Conference Participants : 10
SVT >

Note: You cannot connect an Open Station or DTMF Device into a conference.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
94 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

32. CALL FORWARD

The following SVT command is used for this feature:

SFC = set feature code

SFA = set feature access
LCFN = list call forward number

The Call Forward feature can be activated from a master station or from SVT programming. To get
access to this feature use the command SFA (set feature access).

Default feature codes:

Mode A = 910
Mode B = 911
Mode C = 912
Cancel = 913

32.1 Call Forward activated from a master station:

This feature gives a subscriber A the ability to route an incoming caller C to another station B. There
exist 3 types of call forward:

32.1.1 At own station A, transfer A to another station B.

Call forward mode A, code 910.

At own station A, forward A to another station B. A dials the feature code (910) plus B's call number.
This can also be carried out when the connection is established in duplex. A short acceptance tone is
heard in A's set immediately. From then on, short information tones (repetitive) is heard in A station at
intervals of 5 minutes. Any call to A will now be routed to B.

Cancelling:
From A: A dial 913X
From B: B dial 913 <A call no>.

32.1.2 At another station B, transfer A to B.

Call forward mode B, code 911

At another station B, forward A to B. B dials the feature code (911) plus A's call number. A short
acceptance tone is heard in B's station immediately. From then on, short information tones
(repetitive) is heard in A station at intervals of 5 minutes. Any call to A shall now be routed to B.

Cancelling:
From A: A dial 913X
From B: B dial 913 <A call no>

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 95

32.1.3 At another station C, transfer A to B.

Call forward mode C, code 912

At another station C, forward A to B. B dials the feature code (912) plus A's call number and then B's
number, (B's number must be dialled within 12 seconds). A short acceptance tone is heard in B's
station immediately. From then on, short information tones (repetitive) is heard in A station at
intervals of 5 minutes. Any call to A shall now be routed to B.

Cancelling:
From A: A dial 913X
From B: B dial 913 <A call no>
From C: C dial 913 <A call no>

The repetitive information tone (every 5 min) can be disabled at any time after the transfer by
switching the set to privacy.
More than one subscriber is allowed to forward to the same station.

Cancel the forward feature:

1. Dial 913 from A's station (followed by X or wait 5 seconds). A's station then receives a
short hurry up tone as an acknowledge.
2. Dial 913 from B's station followed by A's number (within 5 seconds). B's station then
receives a short hurry up tone as an acknowledge.
3. Dial 913 from C's station followed by A's number (within 5 seconds). C's station then
receives a short hurry up tone as an acknowledge.

In all cases 1, 2 and 3 a hurry up tone is heard after dialling 913 as a prompt for the optional call
number.
The length of the search for a forward station is only one, such that if A is forwarded to B, and B is
forwarded to D, then any call to A shall go to B, not D.

32.2 Call Forward activated from SVT programming:

The commands SFA is used to get access to the feature and SCFN and LCFN are used to set and list
call forward numbers via SVT terminal.
Ex: To forward call number 130 to 131:

32.2.1 Give feature access to station number 130.

The station can now make the transfer.
It is not necessary to program feature access when Call Forward is programmed via
SVT.
SVT > sfa
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 130
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 10
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
96 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

32.2.2 Program Call Forward via SVT.

SVT > scfn

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 130
Call Forward Number <100..999/U> : 131
SVT >

SVT > lcfn

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 130
Call Number Call Forward Number
====================================
130 131
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 97

33. SECRETARY TRANSFER.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SSTN = set secretary transfer number

LSTN = list secretary transfer number
SFC = set feature code
SFA = set feature access

This feature automatically transfers calls initiated to the boss to the secretary. Unlike CALL
FORWARD the boss and secretary can confer in full duplex while an incoming call is kept on hold.
The secretary number for the boss is programmed using the Service Terminal, or it can be
programmed on the boss station by dialling a feature code. The default feature code is 935. To delete
the secretary transfer feature, the default code is 936X and can be dialled either on the secretary or
the boss station.

Caller A calls to the boss, but instead a connection between A and the secretary is established, (both
get warning tones). When the secretary presses 0-button a connection between secretary and boss is
made. The secretary and boss get a warning tone and establish a full-duplex connection. Caller A is
put on hold, and gets a short privacy tone and then no audio, but the station remains on.
The secretary can now toggle full duplex conversation between boss and caller A by pressing
0-button. Each time the secretary presses 0, a full duplex conversation is established and both parties
get a warning tone. The remaining party gets a hold tone if he is the caller A, or is simply cancelled
with no tone if he is the boss. There is no limit to the number of times the secretary can press 0.

If A cancels while on hold, no further connection can be made between secretary and caller A, using
the 0-button.
The secretary puts the incoming caller A through to the boss by pressing X instead of 0 while in
duplex connection with the boss. This causes the secretary to be cancelled (no tone). The caller A
and the boss get warning tones and a full duplex connection is established, (from A to boss).

If the boss does not wish to accept A's call, then he can press X while in full duplex with the secretary,
or the secretary can press X while in full duplex with A. Several stations can forward to the same
secretary.

To get access to the Secretary Transfer feature use the command SFA (set feature access)
Use the SSTN command to program a secretary Transfer. For example, boss 103 has secretary 110:

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 35,36
Operation <+/-/=> : +

SVT > sstn

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Secretary Transfer Number <100..999/U> : 110
SVT >

Use the command LST to list the secretary transfer status:

SVT > lst
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Call Number Secretary Transfer Number
===========================================
103 110

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
98 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

34. CALL TRANSFER.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SFC = set feature code

SFA = set feature access

Subscribers in the system can call a certain number (the transfer centre) and request for connection
to another extension. To get access to the Call Transfer feature use the command SFA (set feature
access).

Subscriber A calls B (the transfer centre). A asks for a connection to subscriber C. B dials the feature
code 916 followed by C's number. All three stations are now connected, but there is only audio
connection between B and C (A is put on hold and gets a continuous hold tone).

The transfer centre (B) can now establish a connection between A and C and leave the connection by
dialling X.

If the transfer centre (B) decided not to make the connection between A and C then he dials the
feature code 916 and C is cancelled, and B is reconnected to A.

The feature is enabled/disabled from the Service Terminal.

For example, station 120 is the transfer centre:

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 120
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 16
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

To list:

SVT > gfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 120
Feature Access <10,-,69/*> : *
Status <Enabled/Disabled> : e
Call Number ID Enabled Feature Access
===============================================
120 16 Call transfer

Note:
The transfer centre can transfer a call from a station A in one sector, to a station B in a different
sector.
Since A and B are programmed into different sectors, they cannot call each other directly.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 99

35. CENTRAL ANSWERING SERVICE (CAS).

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:
SCASN = set central answering service number
SCASNU = set central answering service number undefined
SCASMD = set central answering service mode
SCASM = set central answering service member
SCASMU = set central answering service member undefined
SCAST = set central answering service times
SCASPDC = set central answering service programme distr. Channel (caller and operator)
SCASPD = set central answering service paging data
SCASHN = set central answering service hunt number
SCASDL = set central answering service direct log on
SCASRM = set central answering service relay mode
SPT = set privilege type
SFC = set feature code
SFA = set feature access
SCASFT = set central answering service feature text
SCASGCG = set central answering service group call group
SCASLM = set central answering service LED mode
SCASSM = set central answering service scroll mode
SCASLRM = set central answering service local reset mode
SCASOFL = set central answering service overflow limit
SRM = set relay mode.
LCASN = list central answering service number(s)
LCASM = list central answering service members
LCAST = list central answering service times
LPCAST = list programmed central answering service times
LDCAST = list default central answering service time
LCASFT = list central answering service feature text
LCASDL = list central answering service direct log on
LCASGCG = list central answering service group call group
LCASLM = list central answering service LED mode
LCASLRM = list central answering service local reset mode ( enabled / disabled)
LPT = list privilege type
LCASOFL = list central answering service overflow limit

A number of stations can be programmed in a line-chain group for simultaneous central answering
services with automatic queuing of incoming calls. A total of 40 groups can be programmed to the
system. Any numbers of operators can log into the same CAS group. An operator can only log into
one CAS group at a time.
To get access to the different CAS features the command SFA (set feature access) must be used.

Station login:
A station can via SVT be given the privilege CAS operator (feature ID no 28). By dialling a feature
code (login default code is 928), the station can log in and out, as a member to any of the 40 CAS
groups. To log out, the code is 928X.

SVT login:
Any station can be logged in and out, as a member to any of the 40 CAS groups, via SVT.
When logged in via SVT (SCASM), then the CAS feature access is not necessary.
The operator can not log out from the CAS group, by dialling the feature code from the station, unless
he is given the feature access to feature no.28 (928 CAS log-on).
Each CAS group will via SVT be given a normal call number (SCASN).
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
100 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Any station can call this number, and will automatically be put on hold to:
- a ringing tone, and is occupying one time slot.
- one of the 8 programme distribution channels (SCASN or SCASPDC).

A station can call a CAS group in one of the following ways:

- by (one dialling key) Direct Dialling,
- by one button Direct Access (stations AB917, AB918, AB 919)
- by activating “remote input” function on stations AA960/AA961/AA916
- by dialling the complete CAS number on the stations keypad, as normal.
- by dialling a feature code ( CAS request 970), plus CAS call number, plus a text number plus a
priority number.

To each CAS group will be programmed a hunt number. If a call is not accepted by an operator within
a certain time, then the call will be routed to the hunt number.
If the hunt number is programmed to be the CAS call number itself, then the call will be camped on to
the CAS group indefinitely, until answered.

Each CAS group has 7 feature texts.

These texts are changed by the command SCASFT, and listed by the command LCASFT.
To each feature text is linked two timers for control of the relay in the initiating AA960 station, and the
receiving CAS operators AA960 station.
Feature text 3-7 can be individually selected for each CAS call.
The CAS calls are operating with 6 different priority levels.
Default priority level is 1 for all calling stations.
To select priority levels from 2-6, and feature text no. 5 with priority 6, when calling to CAS group
number 666, you must dial the following string:

<Feature Code, CAS request> <CAS group call number> <CAS text no.> <Priority level no.>

The string will be: 970 666 5 6

The above CAS call will now be first in the queue to the CAS group, since the call is requesting the
highest priority level 6.

35.1 CAS Modes:

4 different modes for operation of the CAS function are available in the system.

Mode 1: This is the default operation of the CAS function (default mode). A call is
presented to the first operator logged on. The next call will be presented to the
next operator logged on. Calls are accepted one by one.
When all on-logged operators have been presented a call, then the next incoming
calls will be queued.

Mode 2: Used when a PC is connected to CB901. All calls and all free
operators are queued and monitored on the PC's video display unit. The CAS
operators connect themselves with any of the queued incoming calls.
Mode 3: If the PC is up and running, the operation will be as indicated in Mode 2,
otherwise as mode 1. (Acknowledge is not received from the PC).
Mode 4: The call is presented to all operators in parallel. It will ring in all operators'

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 101

stations. When an operator accepts the call, the next call will again be presented
to all other operators in parallel. This mode should be used when the operators are
using display stations AA960 and the queue and callers are listed in the display.
There can be maximum 5 operators in each CAS group for mode 4.
The CAS relay function will only operate in mode 4.

35.1.1 CAS MODE 1, General operation of the CAS function:

If there are operators logged on, the first call to the CAS group will be offered to that operator that first
logged on. The second call to the second operator, when the first operator is in conversation, and so
on. The caller will hear a ringing tone in his station until the operator answers, or can listen to a
programme distribution channel. The operator that gets a call will always hear a ringing tone. This
tone lasts for 15 sec's (programmable with SVT command SCAST) during which time the operator
can accept the call by pressing the 0-button. If he accepts, the operator and the caller will enter a full
duplex conversation. If the operator does not accept the call, i.e. presses the X-button, or does not
accept within the 15 sec's time-out, the call will be offered to the next free operator in the CAS group.

If the CAS operator places the station in privacy, it will be registered as busy and bypassed.
If however the operator wants to receive CAS calls, but be in privacy for direct calls, then the station
must be programmed with privilege no. 25 ( CAS Enable privacy switch )

If the call has been offered to all available operators, and none of them accepted the call, the CAS
process will give the caller a hunt number to call instead (time before hunt programmable with the
command SCAST). This number may be a normal call number or another CAS group. This could also
be a "dummy call number" with auto paging. This will give automatically paging with caller's
identification in receiver's display. The hunt number can also be the same CAS number, to let the call
go in the same group until answered.
If the hunt number is the same CAS group, then the hunt will be treated as a new call and possible
‘paging call up data’ will be transmitted again.

The caller will hear a ringing tone or be logged on to a programme channel until the operator answers.
The programme distribution channel is programmed with the command SCASN or SCASPDC.
The caller is not using a time-slot (half link) when camped on to a programme distribution channel.

If 'undefined' (U) is programmed for ‘ camp-on programme distribution channel’ a ringing tone will
heard.
The caller is then camped on to one time-slot ( half link ) in the central.

The CAS operator will have a 2 second delay (programmable with the command SCAST) between
accepted calls, this to be able to initiate outgoing calls.

Stations given the privilege CAS PRIORITY (privilege no. 12) will always receive the first call to the
CAS group, if more operators are logged in.
A calling station given the privilege CAS PRIORITY will always be put first in the queue.

In the following example we have these requirements:

- CAS mode 1
- CAS group access code number: 666 in stage no. 1
- CAS group (one of 40): 1
- CAS group located to stage 1
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
102 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

- CAS hunt number: 104

- CAS time before hunt 1 min
- CAS time before next operator 30 sec’s
- CAS pager number, call-up and answer: 10104
- CAS operators/Direct Access stations 105-110
- Programme Distribution channel call-up 2
- Programme Distribution channel operator 1
- Relay Mode Yes

When a CALL is made to the CAS group, the room number should be displayed in the paging
receiver, (ex. "ROOM-110"). If the calling station is a Display station AA960, the built in relay should
operate a blinking lamp (on/off ratio of 0.5 sec) When the call is answered, the message "OK-110" is
displayed.
The command SCASPD will control the text "ROOM-" and "OK-", and the call number is displayed
since pre-programmed paging data is NOT programmed (SPPD). The stations 105-110 must be
defined with "Convert DC-shift to Direct Dial Table Tone" (privilege no. 15).

SCASN, Set CAS Number:

SVT > scasn
CAS Number <100..999> : 666
CAS Group <1..40> : 1
Run CAS Group in Stage <1..1> : 1 :Note 1
Mode (1) <1..4/D> : 1
Hunt Number (Undef) <100..999/U> : 104
Callup Program Distribution Channel (1) <1..8/U> : 2
Operator Program Distribution Channel (1) <1..8/U> : 1 :Note 2
Enable CAS Relay Feature ? <Y/N> : Y
SVT >

Note 1:
Only implemented for stage no. 1.
For possible future implementation if required.

Note 2:
The number of on-logged CAS operators are then not limited to free time-slots in the CB901 central,
since they will be connected to a programme channel when the CAS group is called.
The command SCASMD (Set CAS Mode), SCASHN (Set CAS Hunt Number), SCASPDC (Set CAS
Program Distribution Channel) and SCASRM (Set CAS Relay Mode) could also have been used.

SCASMD, Set CAS Mode

SVT > scasmd
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Mode <1..4/D> : 1
SVT >

SCASHN, Set CAS Hunt Number

SVT > scashn
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Hunt Number <100..999/U> : 104
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 103

SCASPDC, Set CAS Program Distribution Channel

SVT > scaspdc
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Callup Programme Distribution Channel <1..8/U> : 2
Operator Programme Distribution Channel <1..8/U> : 1
SVT >

SCASPD, Set CAS Paging Data

Use the SCASPD (Set CAS Paging Data) for data related to the paging feature. The pager data will
only be transmitted, when the call is made from a Direct Access station given the privilege Paging
Always.
SVT > scaspd
CAS Group <1..40> : 1
Callup Data Pager Number (Undef) <1..99999/U> : 10104
Callup Data Beep Coding (0) <0..9/D/U> : d
Callup Data Call Type (3) <0..9/D/U> : d
Callup Data Number of Transmissions (1) <0..9/D/U> : d
Callup Data Priority (3) <0..9/D/U> : d
Callup Data Display Message Prefix (Undef) (Max 8 char) : ROOM-
Answer Data Pager Number (Undef) <1..99999/U> : 10104
Answer Data Beep Coding (0) <0..14/D/U> : d
Answer Data Call Type (3) <0..9/D/U> : d
Answer Data Number of Transmissions (1) <0..9/D/U> : d
Answer Data Priority (3) <0..9/D/U> : d
Answer Data Display Message Prefix (Undef) (Max 8 char) : OK-
SVT >

Callup Data is the pager set-up used when calling into the CAS group.
Answer Data is the pager set-up used when the call is answered by a CAS operator.

For all data related to the control of the paging encoder, the default values are used. See chapter 19
for details.

The CAS operator stations 105 to 110 must be programmed with feature access to "CAS Log On/Off"
(feature ID no. 28) and the privilege "A-subscriber Always Page" (privilege no. 10).
If the CAS operator stations are using “remote input” feature (AA960/AA961/AA916) these must be
programmed with the command SDDD (direct dialling, tone C). If the CAS operator station is Direct
Access station AB919, then this station must be programmed with privilege no. 15 (Convert DC-shift
to Direct Dial Table Tone C"). Use the commands SPT and SFA.

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105-110
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 28
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105-110
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 10,15
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT >

The CAS operator must log on to the CAS group by dialling 928666. To log out, dial 928X. Any
station can call this CAS group by dialling call number 666.
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
104 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SCASM, Set CAS Members (operators)

A CAS operator can also be logged on to a CAS group via SVT programming. The command SCASM
(Set CAS Member) is used. The operator can then not log out from the group, by dialling the feature
code, unless he is given the feature access ( privilege).
SVT > scasm
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 110
CAS Group <1..40> : 1
SVT >

To call the CAS group from a Direct Access station (AB917, AB918, AB919) or a station with “remote
input” function (AA960/AA961/AA916), the call number 666 must be programmed as receiving direct
dialling number. Use the SDDD (Set Direct Dialling Data) command. The direct access stations
AB917, AB918 and AB919 must also be programmed with the SPT command, privilege no. 15
"Convert DC-shift to Direct Dial Table Tone C".
SVT > sddd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 110
Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 1
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 12
Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 666
SVT >

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 110
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 15
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

CAS Times

A text table is linked to timers 4-33.

These timers are controlling the relay inside the calling station and the receiving CAS operator
station.
By dialling the feature code 970 (CAS request), plus the CAS call number, plus text no. 3-7, plus
priority 1-6, the caller can control the operating sequence of the relays.
The priority selected will place the call in the queue accordingly.
If the CAS group is called by the normal CAS call number directly, the priority is 1 (default).

CAS timing parameters can be adjusted with the command SCAST (Set CAS Times).

1. Total ring before hunt. The time from the call is made to the CAS group, and until it hunts to the
hunt number.
This time should be more than the maximum number of on-logged CAS operators, multiplied
with the time programmed for time ID no. 2.

2. Operator ring, next operator. The ringing time at one operator, before the call hunts to the next
operator.

3. Operator free (after X). The time between the operator has cancelled one connection, and until
he will receive the ringing from the next call in queue.

NOTE:

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 105

Timers 4-33 are for control of the relay inside AA960.

4: Caller-Onlogged ON The nurse has logged ON to the CAS group, from the patient room.
5: Caller-Onlogged OFF by dialling: 928 <CAS call no.> or 933 (direct CAS log-on )

6: Caller-Night ON The Nurse have called a CAS group which is transferred.

7: Caller-Night OFF (Night transfer).

8: Caller-Request ON 1: A normal call is made from the room to the CAS group, by
9: Caller-Request OFF dialling the CAS number directly.
This call will always have priority 1.
2: The nurse has called the CAS group by dialling:
970 <CAS call no.> <Text no.3> <Priority 1-6>
Example: 970 666 3 6
This call is given the highest priority 6, and will be placed at the
beginning of the queue of callers to the CAS group.

10: Caller-Nurse ON The nurse has called the CAS group by dialling:
11: Caller-Nurse OFF 970 <CAS call no.> <Text no.4> <Priority 1-6>
Example: 970 666 4 2

12: Caller-Assistance ON The nurse has called the CAS group by dialling:
13: Caller-Assistance OFF 970 <CAS call no.> <Text no.5> <Priority 1-6>

14: Caller-Emergency ON 1: The nurse has called the CAS group by dialling:
15: Caller-Emergency OFF 970 <CAS call no.> <Text no.6> <Priority 1-6>
2: The nurse have logged in by dialling 933 (direct CAS log-on)
When logged in, the nurse dials the emergency number which is
programmed to be the CAS call number by command: SCASDL
16: Caller-Silent ON This timer should be used when there is no speech communication,
17: Caller-Silent call button only.
OFF The caller dials: 970 <CAS call no.> <Text no.7> <Priority 1-6>

18: Oper-Onlogged ON The CAS operator has logged on to the CAS group
19: Oper-Onlogged OFF

20: Oper-Night ON The CAS operator has made a night transfer by dialling :
21: Oper-Night OFF 932< transfer number.>

22: Oper-Request ON 1: The CAS operator receives a normal CAS call.

23: Oper-Request OFF This call will always have priority 1.
2: The nurse has called the CAS group by dialling:
970 <CAS call no.> <Text no.3> <Priority 1-6>
Example: 970 666 3 6
This call is given the highest priority 6, and will be placed at the
beginning of the queue of callers to the CAS group.

24: Oper-Nurse ON The CAS operator receives a call, which have been dialled as:
25: Oper-Nurse OFF 970 <CAS call no.> <Text no.4> <Priority 1-6>

26: Oper-Assistance ON The CAS operator receives a call, which have been dialled as:
27: Oper-Assistance OFF 970 <CAS call no.> <Text no.5> <Priority 1-6>

28: Oper-Emergency ON The CAS operator receives a call, which have been dialled as:
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
106 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

29: Oper-Emergency OFF 970 <CAS call no.> <Text no.6> <Priority 1-6>

30: Oper-Silent ON The CAS operator receives a call, which have been dialled as
31: Oper-Silent OFF 970 <CAS call no.> <Text no.7> <Priority 1-6>

32: Caller-Local ON Local reset.

33: Caller-Local OFF

NOTE:
The following relay modes defines the operation of the relay in the AA960 station.

Relay Mode 1: The station is a CAS caller.

Relay mode 2: The station is a door station. ( Door relay operation ).
Relay mode 3: The station is a CAS operator.

Commands:
SRM Set relay mode.
LRM List relay mode.
HRM Help relay mode.

SCAST, Set CAS Times

SVT > scast
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Time ID <1..33> : 1
Total ring before hunt (300) <0..36000/D> : 600
SVT > scast
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Time ID <1..33> : 2
Operator ring,next operator (150) <50..600/D> : 300
SVT > scast
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Time ID <1..33> : 3
Operator free (after X) (20) <1..100/D> : d

To list the different CAS times, the following commands can be used:

LCAST: List CAS Times, lists CAS feature times for any CAS group
LPCAST: List Programmed CAS Times, lists only the programmed CAS feature times for
any group
LDCAST: List Default CAS Times, lists only the default CAS feature times

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 107

To list the different CAS groups, the command LCASN, List CAS Number is used:

SVT > lcasn

CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
CAS CAS CAS Hunt Night Callup Operator Relay
Group Number Stage Mode Number Number Channel Channel Mode
====================================================================
1 666 1 1 104 - 2 1 YES

To list the paging data for the same CAS group, use the command LCASPD (List CAS Pager Data).
SVT > lcaspd
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
CAS Callup Pager Data Answer Pager Data
Group Number BC CT NT PR Message Number BC CT NT PR Message
======================================================================
1 10104 0 3 1 3 ROOM- 10104 0 3 1 3 OK-

To list the operators logged on to the CAS group, use the command LCASM, List CAS Members:
SVT > lcasm
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
CAS Group Call Number
========================
1 110
SVT >

Use the GPT, Get Privilege Type to search for and list certain privilege statuses.
Use the GFA, Get Feature Access to search for and list certain feature access status, i.e. “CAS
logon”

SVT > gpt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*> : *
Status <Enabled/Disabled> : e
Call Number ID Enabled Privilege Type
===============================================
105 10 A Always Page
15 DC shift

SVT > gfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105
Feature Access <10,-,69/*> : *
Status <Enabled/Disabled> : e
Call Number ID Enabled Feature Access
===============================================
105 28 CAS logon

A CAS group can be programmed undefined by the command SCASNU, Set CAS Number
Undefined:

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
108 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

This will log OFF all operators.

SVT > scasnu

Undefine CAS Number <100,-,999/*> : 666
SVT >

Night Transfer
The Night Transfer Number can be changed by an operator logged on to the CAS group, if he has
access to the feature CAS Night Transfer (feature ID 32). Use command SFA (set feature access).

- dial feature code (default 932) + new number (night transfer)

- dial feature code (default 932) + old number (cancel night transfer)

This feature code for Night Transfer can be changed by the SFC (Set Feature Code) command.

CAS Direct Logon/logout.

It is possible to log in to a default CAS group with a feature code only. The station where logged on
(110) must have access to the features CAS log-on and CAS log-off. The command is SCASDL (Set
CAS Direct Logon).
SVT > scasdl
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 110
Direct Logon Number <100..999/U> : 666
SVT >

If the station, which logged on, is a Direct Access station (AB917, AB918, AB919), the command
SDDD must be used to access the CAS group in above example:
SVT > sddd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 110
Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 1
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 12
Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 666
SVT >

Use the command SFA to give call number 110 access to feature ID no. 33 and 34 Direct CAS log--
on and Direct CAS log-off. If always paging is required, also give station 110 privilege no. 10, A-
subscriber Always Page.

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 155
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 33,34
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT > sfa

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 155
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 10
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

The Direct Access station no.110 can now log into the group with access number (CAS group no. 1)
by the default feature code 933. To log out use the code 934.
These feature codes can be programmed with the command SFC.
Accept calls to a direct access station by pressing the "CALL" button.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 109

CAS Priority.
A CAS operator will be inserted first in the available operator queue if he has the "CAS Priority"
privilege '12'. Use the SPT (Set Privilege Type) for programming.

35.3 CAS MODE 2, PC monitoring the CAS feature:

All calls, and all free operators are queued.
When calls are made from the stations to the CAS group, then the calls will be queued as they are
made. But there will be no indications in the operators loudspeakers.
Incoming calls to the CAS group will be monitored on the PC monitor only.
The CAS operators can then connect themselves with any of the queued incoming calls.
This can be done by remote dialling via the PC, or by using the feature CALL RECONNECT from the
CAS stations.

To set the CAS mode:

SVT > scasmd
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Mode <1..4/D> : 2
Define the events to be logged: (see appendix D for Status Input/Output Specifications)
In this example the following events will be logged on the PC:
- no. 24. CAS call
- no. 25. Direct CAS call
- no. 61. Call Redirect
- no. 62 Call Reconnect

The command SSE (Set Status Event) is used:

SVT > sse
Call Number <100,-,999> : 105-110
Status Output Event ID <0,-,62/*> : 24,25,61,62
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT >

Direct the output to the PC, use the command SSO (Set Status Output):
SVT > sso
Status Output Event ID <0..522> : 24
Stage <1..1> : 1
Output Device 1 <pC/pRinter/Undef> : c
Stage <1..1/*/M> : 1
Output Device 2 <pC/pRinter/Undef> : u
SVT >
SVT > sso 25 1 c 1 u
SVT > sso 61 1 c 1 u
SVT > sso 62 1 c 1 u

Define the output port for the PC, use the command SD (Set Driver):
SVT > sd
Driver <sVim/Pager/pC/Dsp> : c
Port <1..4> : 3
WARNING : Remember to reset whole system to activate new driver data !

Use the command STTY (Set serial port characteristics) command to set the characteristics for the
PC port.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
110 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

35.3 CAS MODE 3, PC monitoring the CAS feature with ACK/NACK signals:
If the PC-driver is up and running, then the operation will be as described for CAS Mode 2, otherwise
as for Mode 1.
If the ACKnowledge signal is received from the PC, then the CAS will operate in Mode 2.
If the ACKnowledge signal is not received from the PC, then the CAS will operate in Mode 1.

Do programming as for mode 2 with the addition of enabling the handshaking between the CB901
central and the PC.
SVT > scom
Driver <1..8/D> : 6
ACK/NAK ON(1)/OFF(0) <0..1/D> : 1
Retry Max <0..3/D> : 3
Timeout/ms <150..2000/D> : 1000
SVT >
The CB901 central will now re-transmit maximum 3 times if ACK is not received.
Next time there is a change in one logged event, CB901 will only transmit one time, until ACK is once
again received from the PC.
When ACK is received from the PC, then the sequence of max. 3 re-transmissions will continue until
no ACK is received again.
The CB901 will then continue to transmit only one time for each change in the status for enabled
logging of events, until ACK is one more time received. And so on.
The CB901 central will wait 1000 ms before marking the PC port DOWN.
In practical operation only mode 1 and mode 3 will be used.

35.4 CAS MODE 4, CAS Calls Presented To Operators In Parallel:

CAS mode 4 is normally used when the operator are equipped with display stations AA960 or AA961.
When a CAS call is made, it will start ring in all AA960 operators logged on simultaneously. When
several CAS calls are made, the display will auto-scroll how many callers in queue, ID text and call
number for the first entry., (QUEUE 3, ENTRY 1, ID TEXT, CALL NO.). To display the next caller’s ID
and step through the ID queue, press digit 3 on the station’s keypad. To reverse in the queue, press
button 2. To return to the first entry, press button 1. To accept the selected entry, press button 0 or F.
A full duplex conversation is established.
Note: Each AA960 CAS operator logged on will occupy one time-slot in the central when a CAS call is
queued.
A maximum of 5 operators can be logged on to each CAS group.

CAS Relay Mode

The CAS Relay Mode is valid for stations AA960 and AA961.
The following command is used:
SCASRM - Set CAS Relay Mode

The following information can be programmed for each CAS group:

A. Yes. The relay will operate when this CAS group is called. Also see the command SRM
(Set Relay Mode) in Chapter 60.3, Display Station Features.
Set Relay Mode 1 or 3 for CAS.
B. NO. No relay operation when this CAS group is called

When a CAS call is made from a AA960/AA961 station (enable CAS relay feature is set to Yes), the
relay will operate, programmable with the CAS timers no. 8 and 9.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 111

When logged on to a CAS group, the relay will operate, programmable with CAS timers 4 and 5.

SVT > scasrm

CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Enable CAS Relay Feature ? <Y/N> : Y

CAS Relay Local Reset Mode.

Normally when a CAS call is accepted by a CAS operator this will stop the relay operation in the
callers station. The caller station’s relay mode (SRM) is set to 1 for CAS, and the CASRM is set to
YES.
In some applications, (nursing homes/hospitals) the relay operation should not be disabled when the
CAS operator is accepting the call. To reset the relay, the calling CAS member’s station must be
logged on and then logged out again or dial the feature code 961 (CAS Local Reset). This is called
“CAS Local Reset Mode” . The SVT command is SCASLRM. When the CAS call is accepted the
relay will operate ON/OFF with a speed programmable with CAS timers 32 and 33. When local reset
is done, code 961, the relay will stop. The CAS caller’s station must be programmed with access to
feature ID 61 - CAS Local Reset.

SVT > scaslrm

CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Enable CAS Local Reset Mode ? <Y/N> : Y

CAS Feature Text.

The CAS Feature text is valid for Display Station AA960 only. The following commands can be used:
SCASFT - Set CAS Feature Text
LCASFT - List CAS Feature Text

This is the list of the default CAS Feature Text using the LCASFT command:
SVT > lcasft
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Text ID <1,-,7/* : *
CAS Text Current Default
Group id text text
===========================================
1 1 "ONLOGGED " "ONLOGGED "
2 "NIGHT " "NIGHT "
3 "CAS CALL " "CAS CALL "
4 "NURSE " "NURSE "
5 "ASSIST " "ASSIST "
6 "EMERGENCY" "EMERGENCY"
7 "SILENT " "SILENT "

The caller can select which text he want to use when calling the CAS group., and he can choose
between the texts 4 - 7.
Text 1-3 is permanent linked to the functions described in the default text.
The relay in the AA960 station is controlled via the CAS timers 1-33.

The caller must dial the following string to select a text:

970 <CAS call number> <Text number: 4-7> <Priority: 1-6>

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
112 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Call REDIRECT and call RECONNECT.

These functions will be used together with a Personal Computer, logging events in the CB901 central,
when operated from a CAS operator.
Without this visual presentation, the operator cannot monitor the incoming calls as they are being
queued up.
The operator will then be able to REDIRECT incoming CAS calls, when they are displayed on the
screen, to another number in the CB901 central.

Example no. 1.
If the call has been redirected to another CAS group, then the operator can later RECONNECT the
redirected call for direct conversation.
If the REDIRECTED call has already been accepted by an operator in the CAS group the call was
redirected to, then the call cannot be RECONNECTED.
Example no. 2.
If the call has been redirected to a normal station, then the call cannot be reconnected.
Example no. 3.
If the call has been accepted by a CAS operator, then the call can be redirected and possibly
reconnected as explained above in example 1 and example 2.

Example no. 4.
If the call has been received by a normal station, then the call can be redirected and reconnected
as explained above in example 1 and example 2.

Operation of call REDIRECT and RECONNECT.

A: Station no. 100 is given access to features for redirect and reconnect.
Station no. 100 is also logged in as CAS operator (member).
Use the command SFA (Set Feature Access))
SVT > sfa
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 45,46
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

B: Station no 120 is waiting in CAS queue, and is redirected by station no. 100 to another
CAS group with call number 555,
Station no. 100 is then dialling 945120555.
945 (feature code) 120 (calling station) 555 (other CAS number)

C: Station no. 100 is reconnecting no.120 for conversation, and is dialling: 946120.
946 (feature code) 120 (redirected call number)

D: Station no. 100 has received (accepted) a call from no. 120, and is in conversation.
Station no. 100 is then redirecting no. 120 to another CAS group with call number
555.
Station no. 100 is then dialling: 945555.
945 (feature code) 555 (other CAS number.)
If no. 120 is accepted in the other CAS group (no.555), then no. 120 cannot be
reconnected.
The same will be the case if the number that station number 120 is redirected to, is a
normal station.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 113

EMERGENCY Call

For stations logged on to a CAS group, it is possible to call an emergency number . The command
SEN (Set Emergency Number) is used for programming the CAS callers. The emergency number can
be a normal subscriber, a CAS group or a dummy number with pocket paging receiver. In the paging
receiver an emergency text can be displayed. This should be programmed with the command SCID
(Set Caller ID). See chapter 60.2.
When an emergency call is activated, and the emergency number is a CAS group, then the relay in
the callers station is controlled by timers 14 and 15.
The relay in the CAS operators station is controlled by timers 28 and 29.
SVT > sen
Call number <100,-,999/*> : 110
Emergency Number <100,-999/*>: 666 ( CAS group)
SVT >

Central Answering Service LED MODE.

It is possible to program the CAS operator stations’ LED (station lamps) to flash to indicate when it is
a queue of CAS calls. Use the command SCASLM - Set CAS Led Mode. To list, use LCASLM - List
CAS Led Mode.

SVT > scaslm

Cas group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Enable CAS LED Mode ? <Y/N>: Y
SVT >

Central Answering Service SCROLL MODE.

The CAS operator stations’ display can be programmed to automatically scroll how many CAS calls in
queue, the entry number, the identity (ID) and call number. Use the command SCASSM - Set CAS
Scroll Mode. To list, use LCASSM - List CAS Scroll Mode.

SVT > scassm

Cas group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Enable CAS Scroll Mode <Y/N>: Y
SVT >

IMPORTANT NOTE, WHEN CHANGING CAS MEMBERS’ CALL NUMBERS..

If the call number to a CAS operator shall be programmed to a new position in the CB901 central, via
SVT, then the following procedure must be used.
A station with call number 100 in position 2B, is logged in as a CAS member, by the command
scasm, and we shall now move the call number to position 1C.

A: scasmu 100 Station no. 100 must be logged out as CAS operator.
B: scn 100 1c Number 100 is programmed to position 1C.
C: scasm 100 1 Station no. 100 is again logged in as CAS operator.

CENTRAL ANSWERING SERVICE OVERFLOW LIMIT

We can specify how many stations can queue to one CAS operator before hunting.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
114 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SVT > scasofl

Cas group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Overflow Limit <0..10> : 4
SVT >

Example:
2 CAS operators are logged on to the CAS group
Caller no. 1 is camped on to CAS operator no. 1, and ringing.
Caller no. 2 is camped on to CAS operator no. 2, and ringing.
Caller no. 3,4,5,6 are queued (4 stations), and caller number 7 will hunt to the hunt number for the
CAS group.

The default overflow limit is ‘0’ ( No limit to the number of callers in queue.)

CENTRAL ANSWERING SERVICE GROUP CALL GROUP.

To each CAS group, one Group Call Group can be allocated as a CAS Group Call Group. When a
call is made to such a group, all stations logged on to that specific CAS group will receive the
message, when programmed with privilege no. 8 (CAS Operator Group Call). Use the command
SCASGCG - Set CAS Group Call Group. To list, use LCASGCG - List CAS Group Call Group

SVT > scasgcg

Cas group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Group Call Group <1..64/u>: 10

Use the command SGCN to program a call number to the group, for example no. 555.

SVT > sgcn

Group Call Number <100..999 > : 555
Group Call Group <1..64/u>: 10
SVT >

Use the command SGCM to program possible members into the selected group.
This is however not necessary.
Possible programmed normal group members will always receive the group call, in addition to each
station which has been logged in to the CAS group ( present ).

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 115

36. SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE COMMANDS

This chapter lists features that can be used to program the system from line positions. DO NOT
program the system via SVT terminal in the period when line position programming is done.

36.1. Programming call numbers from any master station.

This feature gives the ability to install and test each station in the system without the need for a
service terminal. This feature is intended for service personnel only.

Place switch no. 7 on the processor card NFE 1683 to position ON. The 7-segment display will blink
"s" continuously.
The master stations that requires programming must also have access to the feature Master Station
Programming, feature ID code no. 17. Default, this feature is enabled for all call numbers.

Go to each station in the system and dial the following:

feature code + call number

ex: to give this station the call number 6487 dial: 917 2 6487 1

917 is the feature code

2 is the instruction to change the number
6487 the new number
1 to confirm programming (during the prompt tone)

"X" can be pressed to cancel the programming. If no key is pressed within 10 seconds then this is
interpreted as a cancel.

Remember to set switch 7 in position OFF when programming is finished.

36.2. Programming call numbers from a single master station.

NOTE: This feature is only available to station placed in the reserved position,-line position no.07 in
slave stage no.1. In addition to this feature, this station has access to all the features of a normal
station. This station must also be given access to the feature Master Station Programming, feature ID
code 17. Default, this feature is enabled for all subscribers.

Gives the ability to define and swap call numbers from a single dedicated station without the need for
a Service Terminal.

To programme a change, the programmer keys as follows for each call number in the system:

feature code + stage no (2 digits) + line position (3 digits) + call number

NOTE:
All digits are decimal; note that the first position is 00.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
116 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Define a new call number.

For example, to give line equipment position $1C (decimal 28) in slave stage 3 the call number 6361
dial: 917 0 03 028 6361 1

917 is the feature code

0 to change the call number
03 is the slave stage no.
028 is the line position in decimal ($1C)
6361 is the call no.
1 to confirm programming, "X" button can be pressed to cancel the programming. If
no key is pressed within 10 seconds then this is interpreted as a cancel.

Swap call numbers.

Dial: feature code + call number + call number

For example, to swap the call numbers 6341 and 3845 dial: 917 1 6361 3845 1

917 is the feature code

1 to swap
6361 is one of the call no.
3845 is the other call no.
1 to confirm programming. "X" button can be pressed to cancel the programming. If
no key is pressed within 10 seconds then this is interpreted as a cancel.

36.3. Identifying a call number by use of the 7-segment display on the Processor Card
NFE1683

Identify one station’s call number.

Available for all stations given access to the feature Display Number/unit on LED, feature ID code 39.
Default, this feature is enabled for all subscribers.

Dial the feature code 939 in station 100 (in this example, station 100 in position 00).
The following data will then flash slowly in the 7 segment display on the NFE1683 processor card:
100.00.1
100 Station number.
. Space.
00 Position in the central.
. Space.
1 Stage number 1.
This feature code is also used with the Display Station AA960. To update data to the display (ID
TEXT and TIME), dial 939. Every 5 min. the data will also be automatically updated.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 117

36.4. Identifying a call number by use of the display in a Display Master Station

Identify one station’s: stage no, line equipment no. and software ID no.
Available for all stations given access to the feature Display Number/unit on LED, feature ID code 39.
Default, this feature is enabled for all subscribers.
Dial the feature code 939 in a display station, ex. no. 101
A tone is heard and the following data is visible in the station’s display:
01.0 1-002

01 Stage no. 01
01 Line equipment no. 01
002 Software ID number 002

36.5. Direct Unit Call

This is another useful function for service personal. On a master station, it is possible to dial a feature
code 966 followed by the required stations stage no and line equipment no (in decimal). The call will
go through, even if the station is in privacy, (but not busy). The calling station must have access to
the feature Direct Unit Call, feature ID code no. 66.

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 66
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

From station no. 100, dial the feature code 966 followed by 011011
A call will be established to station with call number 271.

01 Stage no. 01
10(A) 11(B) Line equipment no. for call number 271 in decimal (default call number)

Table:
Decimal: Hex: Examples:
0 00 Dial the station in position C1: 966011201
1 01 Dial the station in position 3B: 966010311
2 02 Dial the station in position CD: 966011213
3 03
4 04
5 05
6 06
7 07
8 08
9 09
10 0A
11 0B
12 0C
13 0D
14 0E
15 0F

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
118 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

37. SECTORING

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SSECT = set sector

LSECT = list sector
LSECTN = list sector numeric
GSECT = get (search) sector

The CB901 system can be divided into independent sectors. Each station can be programmed with
the Service Terminal to receive, transmit or receive and transmit to any combination of sectors.

Station A is a member of sector N. B is a member of sector M. A connection can be set-up between

A and B if:

1. A calls B: A must be programmed to call to sector M, and B must be programmed to

receive calls from sector N.

2. B calls A: B must be programmed to call to sector N, and A must be programmed to

receive calls from sector M.

The system has 32 sectors. Any station in the system can be member of one or several sectors.

Each station can be individually programmed to have access to call into another sector(s) and access
to receive calls from any other sector(s).

All sectors are Service Terminal programmable.

As default, all extensions can call and receive calls from the first sector (1) when the system is
initialised. This means that with no programming of sectoring information, any caller in the system
can call/receive from all other callers.

For example, a central is divided into 3 sectors (3 different companies).

Company A, call numbers 100 - 105. Members of sector 1.

Company B, call numbers 106 - 110. Members of sector 2.
Company C, call numbers 111 - 115. Members of sector 3.

These 3 companies can not dial each other. All 3 companies have a common switchboard operator;
call number 116. This number can call and can be called from all companies. The building has a door
station (call number 117) which can call company A and B. Company A and the switchboard can call
this door station. The door station is programmed into a separate sector, sector 4.

Follow this programming sequence:

1. Undefine all sector members/-transmit/-receive. Use the command SSECT and the "-"
(minus).
2. Program the sector members, transmit and receive. Use command SSECT.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 119

To undefine all sector members, receive and transmit, 100 - 117 use the command SSECT and "-":

SVT > ssect

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : *
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D> : *
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> : *
Operation <+/-/=> : -

In the command SSECT (Set Sector), the Operation <+/-/=> : indicates:

+ ; add specified privilege type to existing privilege data
- ; remove specified privilege type from existing privilege data
= ; assign specified privilege type (existing data will be deleted)

First, to define the different sector members, the SSECT command:

SVT > ssect

Call Number <100,-999/*> : 100-105
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D> : 1
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> : *
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT > ssect
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 106-110
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D> : 2
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> : *
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT > ssect
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 111-115
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D> : 3
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> : *
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT > ssect
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 116
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D> : 1,2,3,4
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> : *
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT > ssect
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 117
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D> : 4
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> : *
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT >

To program the individual parameters for the different sectors/call numbers, the SSECT command:

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
120 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SVT > ssect

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-105
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D : 4
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> : r,t
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT > ssect
Call Number <100,-,999/*> 106-110
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D : 4
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> : r
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT > ssect
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 117
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D> : 1,2
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> t
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT > ssect
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 117
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D> : 1
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> : r
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 121

To list the sectors use the LSECT command:

SVT > lsect

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-117
Call Number Sector Data <M = Member, T = Transmit, R =
Receive>
===========================================================================
100 < 1-16> MRT --- --- -RT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
101 < 1-16> MRT --- --- -RT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
102 < 1-16> MRT --- --- -RT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
103 < 1-16> MRT --- --- -RT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
104 < 1-16> MRT --- --- -RT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
105 < 1-16> MRT --- --- -RT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
106 < 1-16> --- MRT --- -R- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
107 < 1-16> --- MRT --- -R- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
108 < 1-16> --- MRT --- -R- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
109 < 1-16> --- MRT --- -R- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
110 < 1-16> --- MRT --- -R- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 < 1-16> --- --- MRT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
112 < 1-16> --- --- MRT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
113 < 1-16> --- --- MRT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
114 < 1-16> --- --- MRT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
115 < 1-16> --- --- MRT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
116 < 1-16> MRT MRT MRT MRT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
117 < 1-16> -RT --T --- MRT --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
<17-32> --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
122 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

The sectors can be listed numeric with the command LSECTN:

SVT > lsectn

Call Number Sector Data
============================
100 Member : 1
Receive : 1,4
Transmit : 1,4
101 Member : 1
Receive : 1,4
Transmit : 1,4
102 Member : 1
Receive : 1,4
Transmit : 1,4
103 Member : 1
Receive : 1,4
Transmit : 1,4
104 Member : 1
Receive : 1,4
Transmit : 1,4
105 Member : 1
Receive : 1,4
Transmit : 1,4
106 Member : 2
Receive : 2,4
Transmit : 2
107 Member : 2
Receive : 2,4
Transmit : 2
108 Member : 2
Receive : 2,4
Transmit : 2
109 Member : 2
Receive : 2,4
Transmit : 2
110 Member : 2
Receive : 2,4
Transmit : 2
111 Member : 3
Receive : 3
Transmit : 3
112 Member : 3
Receive : 3
Transmit : 3
113 Member : 3
Receive : 3
Transmit : 3
114 Member : 3
Receive : 3
Transmit : 3
115 Member : 3
Receive : 3
Transmit : 3
116 Member : 1-4
Receive : 1-4
Transmit : 1-4
117 Member : 4
Receive : 1,4

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 123

Transmit : 1-2,4

To search the sector and sector type with reference to call numbers, use the GSECT command.

To get call numbers in sector no. 1, members, receive and transmit:

SVT > gsect

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-117
Sector(s) <1,-,32/*/D> : 1
Sector Type <M,R,T,*> : *
Call Number
============
100
101
102
103
104
105
116
117
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
124 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

38. DUMMY NUMBER (WITH AUTO-PAGING)/MULTIPLE CALL NUMBER.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SDCN = set dummy call number

LID = list individual data
GDT = get device type

A dummy number is a number which when called activates auto-paging only. The number has no
station connected and does not occupy a line equipment position. Dummy numbers are used to
program users which have pager receivers only. If a Dummy Number is programmed with Call
Forward to a normal call number, the feature multiple call number is obtained. This way a station can
get several call numbers.

You can program sector membership/receive/transmit and paging number for a dummy number. All
features which require use of a master station are not available (secretary transfer, call forward etc.).

When a dummy number is called, the caller hears a "beep beep tone" for 2 seconds, during which
time the caller can add additional digits which are transmitted to the pager's display. The call is then
automatically cancelled.

If a normal station is requested to have the function to always activate a page call, this station can be
called forward to a dummy number.

Two types of 'dummy numbers' are available:

A. The 10 last individuals in each stage i.e. no.s 256-265.
B. Call numbers programmed with the device type 'none' (N). Use the commands SDT (set
device type). The only difference is that device type none occupies a line equipment
position.

The feature is programmed by the Service Terminal.

A maximum of 10 dummy numbers can be programmed in each stage. These call numbers are the
10 last individuals in each stage i.e.: no.s 256-265. Individual numbers are in decimal and in the
range of 0 - 265 (line equipment numbers $00 - $FE.

SVT > sdcn

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 555
SVT >

To list the different dummy numbers, two different commands can be used.
- LID = list individual data. Fill in the numbers 256-265 to see the dummy numbers call
number.
- GDT = get device type. Search for the device type NONE.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 125

39. VISICALL FEATURES.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SDT = set device type

LDT = list device type

A Visicall station AE 111 consists of a Visicall module plus an additional plug-in station AA 904. The
Visicall module has 32 direct dial keys. The Visicall module also has a 2 x 16 character display.

Programming of the direct dialling keys and buffering of messages are internal features of the Visicall
station.

The position of all Visicall stations in a system must be programmed with the Service Terminal,
otherwise the system assumes these positions are occupied by a standard AA 904 station. Use the
command SDT and program device type no. 3 for AE111.

CALLER IDENTIFICATION

This feature informs a Visicall operator who is calling or who is trying to call.

If the Visicall operator is programmed with the privilege no. 24, (Display Visicall AE111 Information
Automatic) the Caller Identification will always be displayed.

If the privilege no. 24 is NOT programmed,

and the Visicall operator B wants to identify an incoming caller A, then a feature code (926) can be
dialled. This Callers Identification will be displayed.

If the called Visicall station is switched for privacy, then the callers number is displayed automatically,
there is no need to dial the feature code.

If the privilege no. 24 IS programmed, the Callers Identification will always be displayed. No feature
code is needed.
Regardless the position of the privacy switch, the callers number is always displayed automatically.

SVT > sdt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105
Device Type <1..4/N> : 3
SVT >

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 24
Operation <+/-/=> : +

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
126 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MESSAGE DISPLAY

This feature gives a caller the possibility to cause a message string to be displayed on a called
Visicall station. Additional numeric information can be added to the message by keying the
appropriate keys, e.g. "CALL EXTENSION" ---- "6363"

To transmit a message from any station to a Visicall station, first establish a normal connection, then
dial the feature code 927 followed by a number indicating the required message (0 9). If numeric
information is to be added then this should then follow (up to 9 digits).

Type X and then the connection will be cancelled and the message ( and numeric info.) will be
displayed on the Visicall's display.

The Visicall station can store up to 10 pre-programmed messages and this feature along with the
ability to read and delete these messages is an internal function to the Visicall station.

NOTE:
When the Visicall is used by a CAS operator, then the callers identity will only be displayed in CAS
mode 1.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 127

40. CALL NUMBER DATA (ALL).

The following SVT command is used for this feature:

LCND = list call number data

Using the LCND command, all relevant data to a call number can be listed.

Call number 105:

SVT > 1cnd

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105
===========================================================
Data for Call Number : 105
===========================================================
Stage Number : 1
Line Equipment Position : $05
Device Type : AE111
Privacy Category : A
Paging Reply Time : 0
Pager Number : Undefined
Pre-programmed Pager Data : 0 3 1 3
CAS Direct Logon : Undefined
Hunt Number : Undefined
Secretary Transfer Number : Undefined
Speed Call Group : Undefined
Sector Member : 1
Sector Receive : 1,4
Sector Transmit : 1,4
Group Call Member : None

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
128 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

41. LAST NUMBER REDIAL

The following SVT command is used for this feature:

SFC = set feature code

SFA = set feature access

A subscriber can initiate "Last Number Redial" by dialling the feature code 940, (feature ID code no.
40). The subscriber must have feature access to the Last Number Redial feature.
Last number redial is restricted to ordinary calls, group calls, all calls and calls to a CAS (Central
Answering Service) group.

This feature is provided as default and can be disabled using the service terminal (SVT
programming).

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 40
Operation <+/-/=> : -
SVT >

The feature access for last number re-dial is now disabled for call number 100.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 129

42. CALL LAST CALLERS

The following SVT command is used for this feature:

SFC = set feature code

SFA = set feature access

Any subscriber can re-establish a connection to the last 10 callers by dialling a feature code,
code 941 1 0.
To start memorising the 10 last incoming calls the subscriber must use a feature code, code 941 9.
The feature code 941 8 is used to stop the memorising.
Last callers redial is restricted to ordinary incoming calls and calls to stations in privacy.
Using a non display station, the subscriber can only dial the feature code 941 and a call will be
established to the first call logged in the queue.
If the station is a Display Master Station (AA960 or AA961) the user can see the queue of calls in the
display and scroll the queue to search for specific call numbers. The following codes (digits) are used
to display the queue:
941 1 Display first call number in queue. Display shows CALL NUMBER
then digit 3: view next in queue. Display shows CALL NUMBER
digit 2: view previous in queue. Display shows CALL NUMBER
digit 1: view first in queue. Display shows CALL NUMBER
digit 7: delete current entry, and display next in queue. Display shows LASTCALL,
EMPTY
digit 0 or F: to accept entry, establishing call to the displayed number.

941 5 Disables the Call Last Callers information display in idle station. Display shows
LASTCALL, DISPLAY, DISABLED
941 6 Enables the Call Last Callers information display in idle station. Display shows
LASTCALL, DISPLAY, ENABLED
941 7 Deletes the Call Last Callers queue. Display shows LASTCALL, EMPTY
941 8 Disables the Call Last Callers feature for this station. Display shows LASTCALL
DISABLED
941 9 Enables the Call Last Callers feature for this station. Display shows LASTCALL
ENABLED

If a user requires this feature the call number must be programmed with access to the feature Call
Last Callers.
System Parameter no. 1 determine if the queue should store the first or last 10 calls.
Use the command Set System Parameter (SP). See chapter 47, Parameters/Timers.

Subscriber Parameter nos. 2 and 3 is used to enable/disable the indication of the queue in the
display. Use the command Set Subscriber Parameter (SSP) to enable/disable this display. Use the
command List Subscriber Parameter (LSP) to see the programmed data.

In idle the display will show: LAST CALL, QUEUE, DIAL 941

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 41
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
130 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

43. LINE MONITORING

The following SVT command is used for this feature:
SDT = set device type
SPT = set privilege type
LLMS = list line monitoring status

The system can test a subscriber line (detecting a faulty/broken line).

The line monitoring test is detecting the voltage level on the subscriber lines, voltage between line no.
1 and 2. This is the same as the status of the master station's privacy switch (privacy ON/OFF). Only
stations programmed with the privilege no.14 (Privacy Test Line Monitoring) will be tested in this way.
Stations are tested, one per second. The status of all stations with this privilege can be listed with the
SVT using the command LLMS.

NOTE: A station with line monitoring privilege should not use the privacy switch as this will
result in line fault.
If station is device type 2 (display station AA960), and switch no. 4 on NFE 1683 is “ON”, then
all AA960 stations will be monitored approx. every 5 min. The status will be displayed with the
LLMS command.

To program line monitoring test on stations 100-110:

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-110
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 14
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

To list the line monitoring status of stations 100-110:

SVT > llms

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100-107
Call Number Line Status
================================
100 LINE FAULT
101 LINE OK
102 LINE FAULT
103 LINE FAULT
104 LINE FAULT
105 LINE OK
106 LINE FAULT
107 LINE OK
SVT >
The line monitoring status is sent to the printer:
When a line fault is detected for a station, then a message will be sent to the printer port of the
central. The printout will include station call number, date and time. The printer will also inform when
the line is OK again.

SVT > sso

Status Output Event ID <0..522> : 513
Stage <1..1> : 1
Output Device 1 <pC/pRinter/Undef> : r
Stage <1..1/*/M> : 1
Output Device 2 <pC/pRinter/Undef> : u
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 131

44. SWAP CALL NUMBER

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SWAP = swap call number

To swap two call numbers use the SWAP command. For example, call numbers 100 and 105 should
change line equipment position.

NOTE: The call number data will follow the call number and will also be swapped.

SVT > swap

Call Number <100..999> : 100
Call Number <100..999> : 105
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
132 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

45. DIRECT CONFERENCE DIALLING.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SDCDT = set direct conference dialling table

SFC = set feature code
SFA = set feature access
SPT = set privilege type
LDCDT = list direct conference dialling table

Some stations (programmable with SVT command SPT) can be given access to initiate a conference
call by dialling a feature code plus the required conference group. To get access to the feature the
command SFA (set feature access) is used. The system has maximum 10 pre-programmed
conference groups (0 - 9). The members of each group are programmed with the command SDCDT.
The maximum participants in each group is 10.
NOTE:
Dialling X once on the initiator station will cancel the whole conference.
The receiving stations MUST NOT BE BUSY. Stations in Privacy will be connected.

The default feature code for direct conference dialling is 937 (plus the conference group), but can
be changed with the SVT command SFC.

When programming the participants in a conference group by using the command SDCDT, all
numbers will be automatically entered from the first table position and up. It is very important to
remember that if a member later should be deleted, the table has to be reconfigured so that the
remaining participants are located in sequence from the first position and up to the last. All undefined
call numbers MUST be on the last part of the table.

Use the command SPT to define the stations with access to direct conference dialling.
Ex., station 105:

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 105
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 37
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

Use the command SDCDT to define the participants in group no. 4.

Ex., stations 120, 130, 140 and 150.

SVT > sdcdt

Direct Conference Dialling Table <1..10) : 4
Call Number [0] (Undef) <100..999/U> : 120
Call Number [1] (Undef) <100..999/U> : 130
Call Number [2] (Undef) <100..999/U> : 140
Call Number [3] (Undef) <100..999/U> : 150
Call Number [4] (Undef) <100..999/U> :
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 133

Example:
Delete station 130:

SVT > sdcdt

Direct Conference Dialling Table <1..10> : 4
Call Number [0] (120) <100..999/U> :
Call Number [1] (130) <100..999/U> : 150
Call Number [2] (140) <100..999/U> :
Call Number [3] (150) <100..999/U> : u
SVT >

To list the complete table after this reconfiguration use the command LDCDT:

SVT > ldcdt

Direct Conference Dialling Table <1,-,10/* > : *
===========================================================================
Direct Conference Dialling Table
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
===========================================================================
1 U U U U U U U U U U
2 U U U U U U U U U U
3 U U U U U U U U U U
4 120 150 140 U U U U U U U
5 U U U U U U U U U U
6 U U U U U U U U U U
7 U U U U U U U U U U
8 U U U U U U U U U U
9 U U U U U U U U U U
10 U U U U U U U U U U
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
134 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

46. CALENDAR
The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SDATE = set date and time

LDATE = list date and time
TIME = list date and time

The CPU card NFE 1683 has a built-in real time clock with battery back-up. To start/adjust this clock
use the SDATE command. Follow instruction on the display and fill in data. The time is accepted
when the "return" key is pressed.
The clock has been stopped at the factory by the command CALOFF, in order to preserve the RAM
lithium backup battery.

To set date and time:

SVT > sdate

Year <1980..2079> : 1997
Month <1..12> : 08
Date <1..31> : 18
Hour <O..23> : 15
Minute <0..59> : 30
Second <0..59> : 00
Press return when ready ...
SVT >

To list date and time:

SVT > ldate
MON 18-AUG-97 15:30:00.00
SVT >

46.1Time Zone Adjustment

By dialling the feature code (default 969) it is possible to adjust the time setting in a single stage
system CB901 or individual stages in a multi stage system CB901-2/CB901-3/CB901-M. This is the
same time as indicated in the Display Master Stations AA960 or AA961.
This can be an useful feature for the following reasons:
a Daylight saving time
b. When stages in a multi stage system is located in different time zones, (global system).

The programming must be done from a station located in the stage where the time setting is
requested. In a multi stage system, the procedure must be done from a station in each stage.
Use the command SFA (Set Feature Access) to adjust time from station 112:

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 112
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 69
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >
Adjust the time from a display station:
Add one hour by dialling 969 plus 1
Subtract one hour by dialling 969 plus 2
The clock will be updated immediately in all stations, connected to this stage.
NOTE. Do NOT adjust time setting between 23.00 and 01.00. (11 PM and 01 AM).

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 135

47. TIMERS. SYSTEM WIDE / CAS / SUBSCRIBER

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

ST = set time
SCAST = set CAS times
SST = set subscriber time
LT = list time
LCAST = list CAS time
LDCAST = list default CAS times
LST = list subscriber time
SP = set system parameter
SSP = set subscriber parameter
LP = list system parameter
LSP = list subscriber parameter

In the current software version, 3 different types of timers can be programmed:

1. System wide timers ( 40 timers )
2. CAS timers ( 33 timers )
3. Subscriber timers ( 15 timers )

47.1 System wide timers.

In the current software version there are 40 timing signals that can be adjusted by the SVT command
ST. These are all related to different features, they have a default time and can be adjusted between
a minimum and maximum time. Each timing signal has a id code (from 1 to 40, see table in LT
command).
First we list the timing signals in a standard (default) system; use the LT command. The current time,
default time, minimum time and maximum time is listed. All timing is given in 1/10 sec. units.
To list all the timing parameters use *.
SVT > lt
Time id <1,-,40/*> : *
Time Current Default Minimum Maximum
id (1/10 sec) time time time time
===========================================================================
1 Ring Tone On 10 10 1 50
2 Ring Tone Off 10 10 1 50
3 Camp On Busy 120 120 10 600
4 Not Used 10 10 1 50
5 Wait for Display Action 150 150 10 600
6 Inter Digit Tone 120 120 50 300
7 Privacy Tone on B Side 20 20 5 600
8 Privacy Wait on A Side 120 120 50 600
9 Short / Long DC-shift 5 5 1 10
10 Inter digit dial 1 1 0 10
11 SVIM/Pager Wait Tone 1 4 4 1 50
12 Accept Silent Request 120 120 10 3000
13 Not Used 4 4 1 50
14 Not Used 80 80 20 720
15 Not Used 12 12 1 50
16 Double X Interval 10 10 0 50
17 Not Used 150 150 50 600
18 System All/Group Call Length 300 300 100 36000
19 Priority,Transfer Hold Tone On 6 6 1 10
20 Priority,Transfer Hold Tone Off 30 30 10 100
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
136 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

21 Not Used 10 10 1 50
22 Line Monitoring Interval Scan 100 100 10 500
23 Line Monitoring Interval sub. 10 10 0 36000
24 Line Monitoring Alive 100 100 50 500
25 Forward Warning Pause 1 1 0 10
26 Forward Warning Tone Length 1 1 0 10
27 All Call Warning Tone 10 10 0 50
28 Not Used 10 10 3 300
29 Not Used 0 0 0 36000
30 Not Used 300 300 0 36000
31 Wait for Button Release 50 50 2 200
32 SVIM Absent Registration Length 80 80 20 720
33 SVIM Voice Mail Length 80 80 20 720
34 SVIM Voice Reminder Length 80 80 20 720
35 SWAM System Message Length 120 120 20 720
36 Conference Length 0 0 0 36000
37 Direct Conf. Dialling Length 0 0 0 36000
38 Tie-Line Wait for Response 30 30 0 600
39 Wait for Pager Status 1 1 1 600
40 Wait Extended DD Digit 20 20 0 100
SVT >

Change the duration of all call from default 30 sec. to 2 min use the command ST. The all call/Group
call timing is id 18.
SVT > st
Time id <1..40> : 18
All call / Group call length time [1/10 sec] (300) <100..36000/D> : 1200
SVT >

Make a list of the new timing for all call/group call use the LT command and call up id 18.

SVT > lt
Time id <1,-,40/*> : 18
Time Current Default Minimum Maximum
id (1/10 sec) time time time time
===========================================================================
18 All call / Group call length 1200 300 100 36000
SVT >

47.2 CAS timers.

A number of timers are used to set the different time intervals for the CAS function, for each group:
SVT > lcast
CAS Group <1,-,40/*> : 1
Time ID <1,-,33/*> : *
CAS Time Current Default Minimum Maximum
Group id (1/10 sec) time time time time
===========================================================================
1 1 Total ring before hunt 300 300 0 36000
2 Operator ring,next operator 150 150 50 600
3 Operator free (after X) 20 20 1 100
4 Caller-Onlogged ON Time 1 1 0 15
5 Caller-Onlogged OFF Time 0 0 0 15
6 Caller-Night ON Time 1 1 0 15

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 137

7 Caller-Night OFF Time 0 0 0 15

8 Caller-Request ON Time 0 0 0 15
9 Caller-Request OFF Time 0 0 0 15
10 Caller-Nurse ON Time 5 5 0 15
11 Caller-Nurse OFF Time 5 5 0 15
12 Caller-Assistance ON Time 1 1 0 15
13 Caller-Assistance OFF Time 10 10 0 15
14 Caller-Emergency ON Time 1 1 0 15
15 Caller-Emergency OFF Time 1 1 0 15
16 Caller-Silent ON Time 5 5 0 15
17 Caller-Silent OFF Time 5 5 0 15
18 Oper-Onlogged ON Time 0 0 0 15
19 Oper-Onlogged OFF Time 0 0 0 15
20 Oper-Night ON Time 1 1 0 15
21 Oper-Night OFF Time 0 0 0 15
22 Oper-Request ON Time 0 0 0 15
23 Oper-Request OFF Time 0 0 0 15
24 Oper-Nurse ON Time 0 0 0 15
25 Oper-Nurse OFF Time 0 0 0 15
26 Oper-Assistance ON Time 0 0 0 15
27 Oper-Assistance OFF Time 0 0 0 15
28 Oper-Emergency ON Time 1 1 0 15
29 Oper-Emergency OFF Time 1 1 0 15
30 Oper-Silent ON Time 0 0 0 15
31 Oper-Silent OFF Time 0 0 0 15
32 Caller- Local ON Time 12 12 0 15
33 Caller- Local OFF Time 1 1 0 15

Please see chapter 35 "CAS" for details.

47.3 Subscriber timers.

The following timers can be individually adjusted for each subscriber.

Subscriber timer ID no. 1. Warning Tone.

Subscriber timer ID no. 2. X (cancelling) Tone.
Subscriber timer ID no. 3. Direct Dial Activate.
Subscriber timer ID no. 4. Call Length, A-subscriber (*)
Subscriber timer ID no. 5. All Call and Group Call length
Subscriber timer ID no. 6. Door Relay Time (AA960 relay ON time)
Subscriber timer ID no. 7. Feature Accept Tone.
Subscriber timer ID no. 8. Accept Tone. Wait for optional data.
Subscriber timer ID no. 9. Refused tone.
Subscriber timer ID no. 10. Unit off (testing privacy switch when listening to progr. distribution)
Subscriber timer ID no. 11. Direct Dial Pause (P) - (pause between data in direct dialling table)
Subscriber timer ID no. 12. Call Length B-subscriber (*)
Subscriber timer ID no. 13. CAS Auto Log Out.
The CAS operator will be logged out automatically.
Subscriber timer ID no. 14. Hurry Up Filter. Sets the time interval for hurry-up tone to B-
subscriber, independent of how fast the caller presses the ‘0’ button.
Subscriber timer ID no. 15. Step Up/Down Filter (If the code for Step Program Distribution
Channel or Program Distribution Volume is dialled fast TWICE, then
the Volume or Program Channel will step DOWN one step.
This timer sets the interval between each time the code is dialled)

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
138 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Notes:Timer ID no. 5 is also system timer ID no. 18. System timer ID no. 18 must always be
set longer than subscriber timer ID no. 5
The timer for the initiating station will always be in control, if it is set shorter than system
timer no. 18.
Example: Subscriber with call number 100 is allowed to set up a call with a length of maximum 10
seconds.
SVT > sst
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Time id <1..5> : 4
Call length <0..36000/D> : 100
SVT >
To list, use the command LST (List Subscriber Timers):

SVT > lst

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Time id <1,-,14/*> : *
Call Time Current Default Minimum Maximum
Number id (1/10 sec) time time time time
100 1 Warning tone 10 10 0 50
2 X tone 4 4 0 50
3 Direct dial activate 8 8 0 50
4 Call length A-sub 0 (*) 0 0 36000
5 All / Group call length 300 300 10 36000
6 Door Relay time 25 25 0 600
7 Feature Accept Tone 7 7 0 20
8 Acc.Tone Wait Opt.Data 40 40 0 200
9 Refused Tone 15 15 0 50
10 Unit Off 3 3 0 20
11 Direct Dial Pause (P) 10 10 1 300
12 Call length B-sub 0 (*) 0 0 36000
13 CAS Auto Log Out 0 (*) 0 0 36000
14 Hurry Up Filter 25 25 10 600
15 Step Up/Down Filter 0 0 0 20

* = indefinitely

47.4 System Parameters.

The command Set System Parameter (SP) is used to programme different parameters related to
various features in the CB901 system.
To list the system parameters, use the command List System Parameters (LP).
SVT > lp
Parameter id <1,-,3/*> : *
Parameter Parameter Current Default Minimum Maximum
id text param param param param
===========================================================================
1 Save Last/First Callers 0 0 0 1
2 CAS PD Volume 2 2 1 4
3 Forced PD Volume 2 2 1 4
System Parameter no. 1 indicates if the feature Call Last Callers should store the 10 last or first calls.

47.5 Subscriber Parameters.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 139

The command Set Subscriber Parameter (SSP) is used to programme different parameters related
to subscribers in the CB901 system.
To list the subscriber parameters, use the command List Subscriber Parameters (LSP).

SVT > lsp

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 104
Parameter id <1,-,4/*> : *
Call Current Default Minimum Maximum
Number ID Parameter Text param param param param
=============================================================================
104 1 Ring/Privacy Tone 3 3 0 5
2 Enable Last Callers 1 1 0 1
3 Display Last Callers 0 0 0 1
4 Dial Tone 0 1 0 5
5 Warning Tone 5 2 0 5
6 X Tone 0 2 0 5

Subscriber parameter no. 1: 5 different privacy ringing tones are available.

Subscriber parameter no. 2: Enables the storing and queuing of incoming calls to a subscriber (Call Last
Callers feature), 1 to enable, 0 to disable.

Subscriber parameter no. 3: Enables the display (in a display station) of the queue of incoming calls to a
subscriber (Call Last Callers feature).1 to enable, 0 to disable.

Subscriber parameter 4-5: Duration and sound of the warning tones.

‘0’ means that the tone is disabled.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
140 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

48. SOFTWARE VERSION

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

LV = list software version

To list the system's software version use the LV command:

SVT > lv
Stage Version
=================
1 TX5.7
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 141

49. RESET / PASSWORD COMMAND.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SUP = set user password

RESET = to reset the system
LOG = log out

Before start of programming the CB901 system via SVT, you must log in by typing a password. The
default password is tridex
The password can be changed by the command SUP (Set User Password).
SVT > sup
Old password :
New password :
Verification :
SVT >

You can reset the central attached to the Service Terminal with the RESET command. This has the
same effect as pressing the reset button on the processor.

Use this command with care as you can delete all programmed data (if switch 8 on CPU card NFE
1683 is in position ON).
SVT > reset
WARNING : Reset will clear battery RAM and default values will be loaded

Are you sure ? <Y/N> : y

When programming is finished, you should log out with the command LOG.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
142 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

50. PRINTER OUTPUT.

A printer for logging and listing of data can be connected to serial port no. 6

The following commands can be used for se-tup and control the printer:

STTY = set serial port characteristics

LTTY = list serial port characteristics
SLO = set list output (redirect list command output to printer)

Outputs from all List commands can be redirected to the printer port with the SLO command, (R for
printer).

The printer will output the following:

1. Line Monitoring status changes (Fault/Ok).
2. No timeslots available
3. No interlink 1's available
4. No interlink 2's available
5. Changes in serial link status (ISC1, ISC2 and PC).

This is the output that will be used in the future for logging of CB 901 activities when the system is
interfaced to remote devices.

SVT > slo

Direct LIST command output to <SvT/pRinter> : r
SVT >

Use the SLE command to identify the stations we want to list events for.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 143

51. SYSTEM (CUSTOMER) NAME.

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SSN = set system name

LSN = list system name

Gives the user the ability to define a name to each individual system.

The system name will appear in the different backup commands (in the headings).

SVT > ssn

System Name (Max 23 char.) : “O.B.E. ENGINEERING”
SVT >
SVT > lsn
System name : O.B.E. ENGINEERING
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
144 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

52. INTERSTAGE COMMUNICATION

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SISCT = set inter stage communications table

LISCT = list inter stage communication table

Default the system gives 8 communication channels between stages in a Double Stage System CB
901-2, Triple Stage System CB 901-3 and Multi Stage System CB901-M. These channels are located
on Inter-link Card, NFE1545 (analogue) or NFE1692 (digital 2 Mbits), and two card positions in the
Basic Card-rack DP 979 are reserved for these, (card-pos. 12 and 13). A jumper on the card is used
to programme the correct addresses for inter stage communication, hex address F0-F7 or E8-EF.

The command SISCT command gives the user the ability to individually select the address outputs
and how many between each stage.
In a standard (default) CB 901-2 system, with 8 inter-link channels, the table listing will be using the
LISCT command:

SVT > lisct

ISC Table <1,-,2/*> : *
Stage <1,-,2/*> : *
ISC ISC Positions
Stage Table [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9][10][11][12][13][14][15][16]
===========================================================================

1 1 $f0 $f1 $f2 $f3 $f4 $f5 $f6 $f7 $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- NOTE: Pos.
1 2 $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- 9-16 not in
2 1 $f0 $f1 $f2 $f3 $f4 $f5 $f6 $f7 $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- use.
2 2 $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $--
SVT >

NOTE. Table 2 is only used in systems CB901-3 and CB901-M with double DNC connection.

To reduce the number of channels to 4, use the SISCT command:

SVT > sisct
ISC Table <1..2> : 1
ISC Position [1] <$0..$fe/U> :
ISC Position [2] <$0..$fe/U> :
ISC Position [3] <$0..$fe/U> :
ISC Position [4] <$0..$fe/U> :
ISC Position [5] <$0..$fe/U> : U
Stage <1,-,2/*> : *
SVT >

The new inter stage table will be:

SVT > lisct
ISC Table <1,-,2/*> : *
Stage <1,-,2/*> : *
ISC ISC Positions
Stage Table [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9][10][11][12][13][14][15][16]
===========================================================================

1 1 $f0 $f1 $f2 $f3 $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $--
1 2 $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $--
2 1 $f0 $f1 $f2 $f3 $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $--
2 2 $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $-- $--

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 145

53. INSTALLATION /TERMINATION OF COMMUNICATION PORTS (RS232 &

CURRENT LOOP)
The NFE 1683 processor card is equipped with 8 ports for interfacing to external devices, such as:

- computer equipment
- programming terminal (SVT)
- pocket paging encoder
- interfacing to other stages in a double, triple or multi stage configuration Ring-Master
system.

The different ports can be configured/defined by use of the command SD (Set Driver).
The parameters for each port are programmable using the STTY command if the default setting
cannot be used. Use the LTTY command to check default values.

The Basic Card-rack is delivered in two different models, Standard model DP979
and EMC approved model DP991.
1. Basic Cardrack, Standard model DP979.

The wire connections for the different ports are made on the back side of the motherboard NFE
1523A, on the processor card NFE 1683. Here pins are accessible for termination of a flat ribbon
cable. The 64 pins on the upper plug are used (P2). Two different cables can be used:

A. BF 925 (subscriber cable), 20 leads flat cable with 3M terminals.

Used when connection to a single port is required.

B. NMF 6025, 64 leads flat cable with 3M terminals.

Used when connection to several ports are required.

The service terminal will normally be connected to the 9 pin D-type connector on the front of the CPU
card NFE 1683, but can also be terminated to the 3M terminal for permanent installation.

When using only one BF 925, plug the cable into the 64 pins row where the required port is located,
see layout drawing. For example; only pocket paging connection is requested. Plug one BF925 cable
into the 64 pin row starting at pins 19 A/B. The lower slot on the 3M terminal is then pin 19B, the next
up is 19A and so on.

CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL DEVICES TO 3M TERMINALS OF FLAT CABLE. THE FLAT

CABLE IS TERMINATED TO THE 64 PIN ROW OF THE CPU CARD, PINS 1A/B TO 32A/B:
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
146 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

- - - -
27A RTS
27B CTS
26A RX RS 232 PORT NO. 5 (fixed)
26B GND Service terminal connection (SVT)
25A TX
25B DTR - - - -
24A RTS
24B CTS
23A RX RS 232 PORT NO. 6 (fixed)
23B GND Printer
22A TX
22B DTR - - - -
21A RTS
21B CTS
20A RX RS 232 PORT NO. 4 (default)
20B GND Pocket Paging Connection
19A TX
19B DTR - - - -
18A RTS
18B CTS
17A RX RS 232 PORT NO. 3 (fixed)
17B GND DSP Driver
16A TX
16B DTR - - - -

Service Terminal
9-pin D-connector in front of the NFE 1683. RS 232 serial port pins:
2 RX
3 TX
4 DTR
5 GND
7 RTS
8 CTS
7A + RX 20 mA current loop. Serial input
7B - - - - -
6A + RX 20 mA current loop. Serial input
6B - - - - -
5A + TX 20 mA current loop. Serial output
5B - - - - -
4A +
4B - RX 20 mA current loop. Stage interconnection. PORT NO. 2.
3A +
3B - TX - - - -
2A +
2B - RX 20 mA current loop. Stage interconnection. PORT NO. 1.
1A +
1B - TX

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
 Termination of External RS232 Cable BF952/BF952A, 20 pair cable with
37 pin D-sub connector. The IEC colour coding standard is used.

Pair no: Colour Pin RS232 Colour Pin RS232 Functional

A-wire nos. signal: B-wire: nos. signal: description:
Pin D-sub: D-sub:
1
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

1 white 1 RTS blue 20 CTS PORT NO. 5

2 white 2 RX orange 21 GND Service Terminal RS232
Pin 3 white 3 TX green 22 DTR connection (SVT)
37
4 white 4 RTS brown 23 CTS PORT NO. 6
5 white 5 RX grey 24 GND Printer RS232
6 red 6 TX blue 25 DTR
20 pair cable, ending 7 red 7 RTS orange 26 CTS PORT NO. 4
in loose ends 8 red 8 RX green 27 GND Radio Paging RS232
Basic Card-rack, EMC approved model DP991 Layout..

9 red 9 TX brown 28 DTR

External RS232/Subscriber
10 red 10 RTS grey 29 CTS PORT NO. 3
Cable BF952, 3 meter.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
External RS232/Subscriber
11 black 11 RX blue 30 GND (SVIM)
Cable BF952A, 10 meter. 12 black 12 TX orange 31 DTR
13 black 13 RX+ green 27 RX- Serial input 20mA current loop
14 black 14 TX+ brown 33 TX- Serial output 20mA current loop
15 black 15 RX+ grey 34 RX- PORT NO. 2
16 yellow 16 TX+ blue 35 TX- Stage interconnection
17 yellow 17 RX+ orange 36 RX- PORT NO. 1
18 yellow 18 TX+ green 37 TX- Stage Interconnection
19 yellow 19 brown nc
20 yellow nc grey nc
SEPTEMBER 1997 147
148 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

54. DEFINITION AND CONFIGURATION OF COMMUNICATION PORTS (RS232

AND CURRENT LOOP)

The following SVT commands are used for this configuration:

SD = set driver
STTY = set serial port characteristics
LTTY = list serial port characteristics

To define the functions of the different port use the SD (set driver) command.
Use the STTY (set serial port characteristics) to configure the transmission characteristics for the
different ports.

The default port layout:

Port no. 1 Interstage com. no. 1 (1SC1) current loop

Port no. 2 Interstage com. no. 2 (1SC2) current loop
Port no. 3 Display, RS 232
Port no. 4 Pager/PC, RS 232
Port no. 5 SVT programming, RS 232
Port no. 6 Printer, RS 232

The port 5 and port 6 are fixed and can not be redefined. Port 1 to 4 can be redefined by the
command SD (set driver)

To define pager to port no. 3, use the SD command: (port 4 is default)

SVT > sd
Driver <sVim/Pager/pC/Dsp> : p
Port <1..4> : 3
WARNING : Remember to reset whole system to activate new driver data !

To configure the communication characteristics on the pager port, use the STTY command. For the
ESPA protocol and for interfacing to Scanpager, the default parameters are , (in a CB 901-2/-3/-M
system the Inter Stage Communication will be a part of this command, ISC),
SVT > stty
Driver <sVim/Pager/pC/Dsp/Etp/svT/pRinter> : p
Baud Rate <110/300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200> : 4800
Bits per character <7..8> : 7
Parity <None/Odd/Even> : e
Stop Bits <1..2> : 1
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 149

To list the pager port characteristics, use the LTTY command:

SVT > ltty

Driver <sVim/Pager/pC/Dsp/Etp/svT/pRinter> : p
Driver type Pager
Driver status Enabled
Stage 1
Port 3
Baud Rate 4800
Bits per character 7
Parity Even
Stop Bits 1
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
150 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

55. OPEN STATION

The following SVT commands are used for this configuration:

SPT = set privilege type

SCP = set conference participants
LCP = list conference participants
SPC = Set privacy category

The feature allows a subscriber to ring a busy station (programmed with the open station privilege 17)
and set up a conference call.

Subscriber A calls B (the open station) and a normal duplex connection is made, both A and B get
warning tones.
Subscriber C calls B and a 3-way conference is set up, both C and D get warning tones.
Subscriber D calls B and a 4-way conference is set up, both D and B get warning tones

The call is cancelled the same way as CONFERENCE where in this case subscriber B (the open
station) leads the conference.

The maximum number of participants in the conference is programmed with the SVT command SCP
(set conference participants), default is 5.

See also § 31 in this manual for the Conference feature.

NOTE:
THE OPEN STATION MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE PRIVACY CATEGORY
NEVER (N). USE THE COMMAND SPC (SET PRIVACY CATEGORY)

An open station can make a call to any other station.

An open station can initiate a normal conference by dialling one station at a time.
An open station cannot be called into a normal conference.
If a call is made from an open station, then this open station cannot be called.

The open station should be station 130, and max. participant set to 8. Use the SPT and SCP
commands:

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-999/*> : 130
Privilege Type <1,-,30/*/N> : 17
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 151

56. INTERSYSTEM TIE-LINE

The following SVT commands are used for this configuration

STLD = set tie line data

SOTLAC = set own tile line area code
SDT = set device type
LTLD = list tie line data
LOTLAC = List own tie line area code
LDT = list device type

Two or more geographically separated Ring-Master systems may be connected by means of a tie-line
interface unit coupled to each end of a rented or private owned 4-wire telephone line. The interface
unit is named CE 921.

Dialling access to a tie-line will be prefixed with the digit default code 950 followed by a area code
identifying the required remote central (1 to 5 digits), followed without pause by the local number of
the desired station.

There is no limit in the distance between the installations, and the line can be microwave or radio.

The tie line unit is connected to an ordinary subscriber position in the system.

Only normal calls can be activated over the line. The receiving B-subscriber responds with:

- answer (establishing a call)

- privacy
- busy
- reject (call not established)

Each independent system is allocated an "area code" call number. There can be up to 10 area code
numbers corresponding to 10 interconnected systems. This means that one system can call up to 10
other central.

There can be up to 5 tie-line between any two areas of central. In this configuration, by dialling the
area code number, a group hunting sequence will automatically find the first available free tie-line.
All lines in one direction MUST be connected to the same stage in the system and each line must
have device type "4".

It is advisable to program Tie-Line devices in a separate sector to avoid unintended calls to this
device.

Calls to a third central via a second is not possible.

For installation details, see separate technical manual: OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
152 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Example:
Two CB 901 systems (location A and B) shall be linked together via two tie-line units CE 921.

Data location A:
= area code 2
= digits in call no. 3
= stage no. 1
= CE 921 connected to line position no. 01

Data location B:
= area code 5
= digits in call no. 3
= stage no. 1
= CE 921 connected to line position no. 07

Programming location A:

SVT > sotlac

Area Code <00000.99999/U>: 2
SVT > stld
Direction <1..10> : 1
Area Code <00000..99999/U> : 5
Digits in Call Number (Remote Site) <2..6> : 3
Stage <1..1> : 1
Line Equipment Position 1 <$0..$fe/U> : 01
Line Equipment Position 2 <$0..$fe/U> :
SVT >

Programming location B:
SVT > sotlac
Area Code <00000..99999/U> : 5
SVT > stld
Direction <1..10> : 1
Area Code <00000.99999/U> : 2
Digits in Call Number Remote Side) <2..6> : 3
Stage <1..1> : 1
Line Equipment Position 1 <$0..$fe/U> : 07
Line Equipment Position 2 <$0..Sfe/U> :
SVT > sdt
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 107
Device Type <1..4/N> : 4
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 153

To list the data the commands LTLD and LOTLAC are used.

List of data location A:

SVT > lotlac

Own Area Code : 02
SVT > ltld
Direction: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Area Code: 05 - - - - - - - - -
Digits: 3 - - - - - - - - -
Stage: 1 - - - - - - - - -
Line 1: $01 $-$- $- $- $- $- $- $- $-
Line 2: $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $-
Line 3: $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $-
Line 4: $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $-
Line 5: $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $-

List of data location B:

SVT > lotlac

Own Area Code : 05
SVT > ltld
Direction: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Area Code: 02 - - - - - - - - -
Digits: 3 - - - - - - - - -
Stage: 1 - - - - - - - - -
Line 1: $07 $-$- $- $- $- $- $- $- $-
Line 2: $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $-
Line 3: $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $-
Line 4: $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $-
Line 5: $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $- $-

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
154 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

57. REMOTE DIALLING

The following SVT commands are used for this configuration:

RD = set remote dialling data

SPT = set privilege type
SFA = set feature access

Almost any dialling sequence can be initiated from a remote master station, SVT or personal
computer PC.

A. Remote dialling from a master station

When initiated from a master station, the initiator must have access to the feature Remote Dial to
initiate the remote dial (feature ID 43) and the receiving station must have the privilege to receive the
remote dial (privilege "20").

The initiator dials:

Feature code 943 + call number of receiving station + digits + X

If the call number is invalid or does not exist, the initiator gets the refused tone. Similarly if the
initiator does not have access to the Remote Dial feature or the receiver does not have the privilege
"20" the initiator will get the refused tone.

After dialling a valid call number the initiator gets the prompt tone and can enter up to 23 digits which
are buffered until terminated with an X + time-out. The initiator then gets a busy tone while the
receiving station dials the digit sequence. On completion of the dial sequence, the initiator gets an
accept tone. The receiver gets the digits regardless of whether in the idle or busy state.

In a similar way to programming of direct dialling, the digits X,A,B,C and a pause can be programmed
by dialling X + <digit> within a time-out (default 1.0 secs, programmable timer 16).

X0 Digit X
X9 Pause (default 1 sec, programmable - see Subscriber timer no. 11)
X1 A
X2 B
X3 C

In this example, station 100 forces station 103 to listen to program distribution channel no.4 with
volume 4 for 5 seconds followed by a cancel.

SVT programming:

SPT 103 20 +
SFA 100 43 +

On station 100 dial: 943 + 103 + 9834X9X9X9X9X0 + X

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 155

B. Remote dialling from SVT.

To program the same example as listed on previous page:

Station 100 forces station 103 to listen to program distribution channel no 4 with volume 4 for 5
seconds followed by a cancel.

The pause (P) is the same as the Direct Dialling Pause (timer 28) and is as such programmable.
When the remote dial is completed the prompt returns.
Remember to programme the receiving call number with the privilege "20" in order to accept a
remote dial.

SVT > spt

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 103
Privilege Type <1,-,32/*/D> : 20
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT > rd
Call Number <100..999> : 103
Remote Dial Data (Max 23 char.) <0..9,A,B,C,P,X> : 9834pppx
SVT >

C. Remote dialling from personal computer PC.

Remote dial from a PC is operated the same as from SVT except that the format of message is
different and the event must be enabled with the SSO command. Reference is made to chapter 63
"STATUS I/O SPECIFICATION" in this manual.
Remote dialling is input event no. 1.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
156 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

58. REMOTE CONTROL

The following SVT commands are used for this configuration:

SPT = set privilege

SSO = set status output
SSOT = set status output text
SSE = set subscriber event
LSO = list status output
LSOT = list status output text
LSE = list subscriber event
LPT = list privilege type

A station programmed with access to the feature Remote Control can dial a feature code + data digits
(max 23) + X ( the default feature code is 944, feature ID no. 44 ).
The data digits can be sent to an output for further interpretation. The output device can be:
- personal computer (PC)
- printer

The subscriber gets the busy tone while waiting for either an accept or refused message from the
output device.

The feature can for example be used for access control, CAS display, time registration and remote
control of external devices. The feature code can be dialled from a free station or after a normal
duplex conversation has been established.

To program where the specified event is to be output, the command SSO (set status output) is used.
To program text associated with an event the command SSOT (set status output text) is used.

For detailed description of the status input/output, reference is made to Chapter 63 "STATUS I/O
SPECIFICATIONS" in this manual.

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 44
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 157

59. PROGRAMME CHANNELS.

NOTE: THIS FEATURE REQUIRES A HIGH CAPACITY POWER SUPPLY FOR THE STATIONS.

The CB901 system has 8 Programme Channels and 2 Alarm Channels. The 8 programme channels
can be allocated to use for the following 4 features:

61.1. Programme Distribution Channel, (PDC).

This feature is used to distribute audio programs, such as radio, tape recorder, closed radio
network, etc., to subscribers in the system. The subscribers will dial a feature code to access
the required channel.

61.2. Programme Distribution Group Call Channel, (PDGC).

One or more Programme channels can be allocated to function as a group call channel.
Subscribers with privilege to dial group call (privilege 2) can dial the PDGC number (64
groups), and give a spoken message or transmit a message from an external audio source to
pre-programmed PDGC members. This function will operate on CB901-1/-2/-3 and -M systems,
and the group call message is transmitted to all the stages, in the same channel.

61.3. Local Programme Distribution Group Call Channel, (LPDGC).

One or more Programme channels can be allocated to function as a local group call channel,
local in each individual stage. Subscribers with privilege to dial group call (privilege 2) can dial
the LPDGC number (64 groups) and give a spoken message or transmit a message from an
external audio source to pre-programmed PDGC members. This function will operate on
CB901-1/-2/-3 and -M systems, but the group call message is only transmitted in the local
stage. Different group call messages can be transmitted in different stages simultaneously.

61.4. Programme Distribution Information Channel, (PDIC).

One or more distribution channels can be allocated to function as an information channel.
Subscribers can dial a PDIC number and all subscribers programmed to listen to that specific
information channel can dial a feature code plus the information channel number ,
962 + n ( n= 1....8) and listen to the message. This function will operate on CB901-1/-2/-3 and -
M
systems, and the information is transmitted to all the stages, in the same channel.
When a station is logged on to more than one information channels, then that station will be
connected to the first information channel which is called.

61.5. Forced Programme Distribution Channel.

One or more stations can be given privilege to connect other stations to a programme
distribution channel.
The connected stations cannot cancel themselves out.
The receiving station will be connected with program volume no. 2 as default.
This is system parameter no. 3. ( Listed with command LP )

The maximum of 8 Programme Channels can be allocated to the above 4 features ( 61.1-61.4.)
The following SVT commands are used for the configuration:

HPDA :Help programme distribution allocation

SPDA :Set programme distribution allocation
LPDA :List programme distribution allocation

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
158 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SVT > HPDA

HELP PROGRAM DISTRIBUTION ALLOCATION
======================================
A system's program distribution allocation can be one of the following :

1 Program Distribution :Mode 1

2 Program Distribution Group Call :Mode 2
3 Local Program Distribution Group Call :Mode 3
4 Program Distribution Info Channel :Mode 4

SVT > spda

Program Distribution Channels <1,-,8/*> : 1-3
Program Distribution Mode <1..4/D> : 1
SVT >

SVT > spda

Program Distribution Channels <1,-,8/*> : 4,5
Program Distribution Mode <1..4/D> : 2
SVT >

SVT > spda

Program Distribution Channels <1,-,8/*> : 6-8
Program Distribution Mode <1..4/D> : 4
SVT >

SVT > lpda

Channel <1,-,8/*> : *
=================================================
Channel Program Distribution Mode
=================================================
1 1 Program Distribution
2 1 Program Distribution
3 1 Program Distribution
4 2 Program Distribution Group Call
5 2 Program Distribution Group Call
6 4 Program Distribution Info Channel
7 4 Program Distribution Info Channel
8 4 Program Distribution Info Channel
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 159

59.1 PROGRAMME DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL, (PDC)

The following SVT commands are used for this configuration:

SPDA = set program distribution allocation

SFA = set feature access
SPDC = set program distribution channel
SPDM = set program distribution mode

As default, this feature is available to all subscribers. To refuse access, the command SFA (set
feature access) is used.
The central must be equipped with the NFE1625 or NFE1813 subscriber card, and the Program
Distribution Interface Card NFE1626.
The programme channels must be connected to external programme sources.
This could be a normal radio, tape recorder, closed radio network, e.t.c.

Any person can dial the number 9812 to listen to one programme channel.

Meaning:
98 Feature code
1 Programme channel number 1. Can be from 1 to 8.
2 Volume number 2. Can be from 1 to 4.

To change programme channel or volume (or both), dial the required 4 digits
directly.
It is not necessary to cancel first (X).

Call any subscriber directly for conversation, while listening to the program.
It is not necessary to cancel first (X).
When the conversation is terminated by pressing X, then the programme will automatically return.
The program distribution is terminated when the X pressed when listening to the program.

It is possible, via SVT, to individually decide how many programme channels each
subscriber is permitted to listen to.

The default are 8 channels or the number of channels allocated by the SVT command SPDA - set
programme distribution allocation..

Example:
Station number 100 shall be given permission to listen to programme channels number 1, 2 and 3
only.

SVT > SPDC

Call Number <100,-,999> : 100
Program Distribution Channel <1,-,8/*> : 1-3
Operation <+/-/=> : =
SVT >

A station given the privilege, can enable or disable the possibility to listen to the
programme distribution, for any other station.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
160 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Example:
Station number 100 shall be given access to the feature Program Programme Distribution Channel, to
program that station number 110 shall be permitted to listen to programme channels number 2
and 3 only.
SVT > sfa
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 47
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

Station number 100 will first dial the following number in order to disable all programme channels
from station number 110: 94711090
947 Feature code.
110 Other stations call number.
9 All programme channels.
0 Disable (all channels).

Station number 100 will then dial the following number to enable channel number 2: 94711021.

947 Feature code.

110 Call number of other station.
2 Programme channel number 2.
1 Enable (channel number 2).

Station number 100 will finally dial the following number to enable channel number 3: 94711031.

947 Feature code.

110 Call number of other station.
3 Programme channel number 3.
1 Enable (channel number 3).

Two feature codes are available to step the programme channels and volumes.
This feature is available to all subscribers given access to these two features with the
command SFA (Set Feature Access).

For this feature the Central will operate in two modes.

Mode A.
This mode is default.

The command SPDM (Set Program Channel Mode) is used to select the mode.
SVT > spdm
Program Distribution Mode (A) <A/B> : a
SVT >

948 is the feature code to step the volume in 5 steps.

Each time the code is dialled, the volume will change one step up.
The idle position is OFF.

Step 1 :Volume 1 (minimum, and programme channels ON).

Step 2 :Volume 2.
Step 3 :Volume 3.
Step 4 :Volume 4 (maximum).

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 161

Step 5 :Programme channels OFF.

949 is the feature code to step the programme channels from 1 to maximum 8.
The programme channels the station is permitted to listen to, can be programmed as explained on the
previous page.
When the programme feature is turned ON by dialling 949, the volume will start on level 1.

When the programme feature is turned ON by dialling 948, then the central will connect the last
channel we were listening to.

Example:
This feature is very useful, for example, for the reduced master station and direct access
station, AB919.
On this station we can program direct dialling 948 for button number 7, and direct
dialling 949 for button number 8.

Programming via SVT.

Step 1:
Program volume code to button number 7.

SVT > sddd

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 1
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 7
Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 948

Step 2:
Program code for selection of programme distribution channel, to button number 8.
SVT > sddd
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Direct Dial Table Number <1,-,3/*> : 1
Tone or Key Entry <0,-,13/*> : 8
Direct Dial Data (Max 16 char.) <0..9,X,P/U> : 949

Step 3:
Program Direct Dial Wait time for station number 100, to be "0" seconds.
This will speed up the switching between the different volumes, and the different program
channels.

SVT > sst

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Time id <1..5> : 3
Direct dial activate <0..50/D> : 0
SVT >

Mode B.
We have now defined 9 programme channels. The last channel is defined as programme OFF.
The first time the feature code 949 is dialled, we will be connected to channel number 1.
The next time 949 is dialled, we are connected to channel number 2, and so on.
When channel number 9 is dialled, then the programme is turned off.
The programme volume is now set to level 2 as default.

However, by dialling the feature code 948, the volume can be adjusted in 4 steps.
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
162 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

This will be volume 3-4 1-2-3-4 1-2-3-4 and so on.

Use the command SPDM (Set Programme Distribution Mode) to select the mode:

SVT > spdm

Program Distribution Mode (A) <A/B> : b

NOTE, valid for mode A and B:

When the feature codes 948 or 949 are dialled, then the next higher number volume / channel will be
connected.
However, by adjusting subscriber timer number 15, we can also select the next lower number
volume / channel.
This is done by dialling the feature codes twice within the time set by subscriber timer 15.

SVT > sst

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Time id <1..15> : 15
Step Up/Down Filter <0..20/D> : 10
SVT >

If subscriber number 100 is dialling 948 twice within 1 second, then the program channel volume will
step down one level.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 163

59.2 PROGRAMME DISTRIBUTION GROUP CALL CHANNEL, (PDGC).

One or more Programme channels can be allocated to function as a group call channel. Subscribers
with privilege number 5 can dial the PDGC number (64 groups) and give a spoken message or
transmit a message from an external audio source to pre-programmed PDGC members. The line
position for the spoken message (input to the programme distribution channel) must be programmed.
This function will operate on CB901-1/-2/-3 and -M systems, and the group call message is
transmitted to all the stages, in the same channel.

These 64 groups are not the same as the 64 groups used for normal group call.

The receiving stations will only be connected if they are free ,or in an established conversation.
A possible conversation will be cancelled, and must be re-dialled after the group call is terminated.

Each station can be member of more than one group. (all groups)
If more than one PDGC is received, then the station will remain connected in the first group that
was received.

The PDGC will override a normal programme distribution connection.

The station will automatically be reconnected to the programme channel, after the PDGC is
terminated.

The following SVT commands are used for this configuration:

SPDGCN = set programme distribution group call number

SPDGCNU = set programme distribution group call number undefined
SPDGCI = set programme distribution group call input
SPDGCM = set programme distribution group call members
LPDGCN = list programme distribution group call number
LPDGCI = list programme distribution group call input
LPDGCM = list programme distribution group call members
LPDGCMN = list programme distribution group call members numeric

The audio must be connected from the call number programmed as the Input Call Number, to the
corresponding programmed Programme Distribution channel line input.

In a multistage system the input for the same programme channel, must be wired in parallel for all
stages.

Program call no.555 as program channel Group Call number, group 1.

SVT > spdgcn
Program Distribution Group Call Number <100..999/U> : 555
Program Distribution Group <1..64> : 1
SVT >

Allocate program channel no.4 for Program Distribution Group Call.

SVT > spda
Program Distribution Channels <1,-,8/*> : 4
Program Distribution Mode <1..4/D> : 2
SVT >

Connect the subscriber position with call no.105 to program channel no.4,
via a one pair cable.
This is the group call audio input.
SVT > spdgci
Program Distribution Channel <1..8> : 4
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
164 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Input Call Number (Undef) <100..999/U> : 105

SVT >

Note:
All call numbers programmed by spdgcn will now use program distribution
channel number 4 as a group call link.
If more ‘links’ are required then more program channels must be allocated.
We will add program channel number 5 as the second link.

Allocate program channel no.5 for Program Distribution Group Call.

SVT > spda
Program Distribution Channels <1,-,8/*> : 5
Program Distribution Mode <1..4/D> : 2
SVT >

Connect the subscriber position with call no.106 to program channel no.5,
via a one pair cable.
This is the group call audio input.
SVT > spdgci
Program Distribution Channel <1..8> : 5
Input Call Number (Undef) <100..999/U> : 106
SVT >

Program the stations that shall receive Group Call.

SVT > spdgcm
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 160-165
Program Distribution Group Call Member <1,-,64/*> : 1
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

Station no.100 shall be given permission to call 555.

SVT > spt
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Privilege type <1,-,32/*/D> : 5
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 165

59.3 LOCAL PROGRAMME DISTRIBUTION GROUP CALL CHANNEL, (LPDGC).

One or more Programme channels can be allocated to function as a local group call channel,
local in each individual stage. Subscribers with privilege number 6 can dial the LPDGC number
(64 groups) and give a spoken message or transmit a message from an external audio source
to pre-programmed PDGC members. This function will operate on CB901-1/-2/-3 and -M
systems, but the group call message is only transmitted in the local stage. Different group call
messages can be transmitted in different stages simultaneously.

These 64 groups are not the same as the 64 groups used for normal group call.

The receiving stations will only be connected if they are free ,or in an established conversation.
A possible conversation will be cancelled, and must be re-dialled after the group call is
terminated.

Each station can be member of more than one group. (all groups)
If more than one LPDGC is received, then the station will remain connected in the first group
that was received.

The LPDGC will override a normal programme distribution connection.

The station will automatically be reconnected to the programme channel, after the LPDGC is
terminated

The following SVT commands are used for this configuration:

SLPDGCN = set local programme distribution group call number

SLPDGCI = set local programme distribution group call input
SLPDGCM = set local programme distribution group call members
LLPDGCN = list local programme distribution group call number
LLPDGCI = list local programme distribution group call input
LLPDGCM = list local programme distribution group call members
LLPDGCMN = list local programme distribution group call members numeric

The audio must be connected via one pair, from the call number programmed as the Input Call
Number to the corresponding programmed Programme Distribution channel line input.

NOTE:
The central must be reset after the LPDGC programming is finished, in order to enable the new data.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
166 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

59.4 PROGRAMME DISTRIBUTION INFORMATION CHANNELS, (PDIC).

One or more distribution channels can be allocated to function as an information channel. Subscribers
can dial a PDIC number and give a message into one programme channel.
All subscribers programmed to listen to that specific information channel can dial a feature code
(default 962) plus the required information channel number . To get access to this feature, use the
command SFA (Set Feature Access). This will log the station in, and permit listening each time a
message is transmitted.
Subscribers who have dialled the feature code will automatically be connected to the programme
channel each time one station is dialling the information channel number, to give a message.
When the initiating station is terminating the message by X, then all logged in stations will be
disconnected from the information (programme) channel, and they will be reconnected again each
time the information channel number is called.

This function will operate on CB901-1/-2/-3 and -M systems, and the information is transmitted to all
the stages, in the same channel.
The input to the selected programme channel in each stage, must be wired in parallel.
The following SVT commands are used for this configuration:

SPDICN = set programme distribution info channel number

SPDICNU = set programme distribution info channel number undefined
SPDICI = set programme distribution info channel input
SPDICM = set programme distribution info channel members
SFA = set feature access
LPDICN = list programme distribution info channel number
LPDICI = list programme distribution info channel input
LPDICM = list programme distribution info channel member
LPDICMN = list programme distribution info channel member numeric

Allocate program channel 6 and 7 as information channel.

SVT > spda
Program Distribution Channels <1,-,8/*> : 6,7
Program Distribution Mode <1..4/D> : 4
SVT >

Program the call number to one info channel (program channel no.6)
SVT > spdicn
Program Distribution Info Channel Number <100..999/U> : 580
Program Distribution Info Channel Group <1..8> : 6
SVT >

Program the call number to a second info channel (program channel no.7)
SVT > spdicn
Program Distribution Info Channel Number <100..999/U> : 590
Program Distribution Info Channel Group <1..8> : 7
SVT >

Connect the subscriber position with call no.109 to program channel no.6,
via a one pair cable.
This is audio input for the info channel.
SVT > spdici
Program Distribution Channel <1..8> : 6
Input Call Number (Undef) <100..999/U> : 109
SVT >

Connect the subscriber position with call no.110 to program channel no.7.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 167

This is audio input for the info channel.

SVT > spdici
Program Distribution Channel <1..8> : 7
Input Call Number (Undef) <100..999/U> : 110
Program the receivers to the info channels.
SVT > spdicm
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 210-234
Info Channel Member <1,-,8/*> : 6,7
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

Station no.100 and 110 shall be given permission to call 580 and 590.
SVT > spt
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100,110
Privilege type <1,-,32/*/D> : 7
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

Stations 210 to 234 can dial 9626, (default feature code is 962) and listen to information on
Information Channel number 6, and 9627 and listen to information on Information Channel number 7.

The stations 210 - 234 will now be connected to the information channel, each time the information
channel number is called.

To get access to the feature use the command SFA (Set Feature Access).

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 210-234
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 62
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
168 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

59.5 FORCED PROGRAMME DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL

One or more stations can be given access to this feature, Forced Programme Distribution Channel, to
connect other stations to one programme channel permanently. The feature code is 964 and the
feature code ID is no. 64.
SVT > sfa
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 100
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 64
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

Station number 100 is now given privilege to connect any stations in the system to one of the
programme channels.

Example:
Station 100 shall connect station 250 to programme channel number 5, and the following code is then
dialled in station 100: 964 250 5 1.

964 :Feature code

250 :Call number
5 :Programme channel number
1 :Confirm programming

Station number 250 cannot cancel the connection by pressing the X button.

The connection must be cancelled by station no. 100 by dialling the code: 964 250 5 0
The last ‘ 0 ‘ is instruction to cancel.

Station number 250 are connected to the program channel with volume 2 as default.
This value can be programmed from volume 1 - 4 via system parameter number 3.

We will change the volume to level 3:

SVT > sp
Parameter id <1..3> : 3
Forced PD Volume (2) <1..4/D> : 3
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 169

60. DISPLAY STATION FEATURES

The following SVT commands are used for this feature:

SCID - Set Caller ID

LCID - List Caller ID
SFTL - Set Feature Text Language
HFTL - Help Feature Text Language
SFT - Set Feature Text
LFT - List Feature Text
SRM - Set Relay Mode
LRM - List Relay Mode
SMDT - Set Message Display Text
LMDT - List Message Display Text
SAC - Set Access Code
LAC - List Access Code
SMDM - Set Message Display Mode
LMDM - List Message Display Mode

60.1 FEATURE TEXT LANGUAGE

The feature text (features, information etc.) used in the Ring-Master Display Station AA960 can be
displayed in four different languages; English, Norwegian, German and French. Use the command
HFTL (Help Feature Text Language) to list the different languages.

SVT >
HELP FEATURE TEXT LANGUAGE
============================
A system's feature text language can be one of the following :

1 English
2 Norwegian
3 German
4 French

The default language is English.¨

NOTE: Some Scandinavian letters must be substituted with other ASCII characters for entering of
text:
Æ=[
Ø=\
Å=]
Ü=∧
Ä= @
Ö=_

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
170 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

To list the default English feature text, use the command LFT (List Feature Text).
SVT > lft
Feature Text id <1,-,37/*> : *
Text Default Current
id text text
================================
1 "PROGRAM1" "PROGRAM1"
2 "PROGRAM2" "PROGRAM2"
3 "PROGRAM3" "PROGRAM3"
4 "PROGRAM4" "PROGRAM4"
5 "PROGRAM5" "PROGRAM5"
6 "PROGRAM6" "PROGRAM6"
7 "PROGRAM7" "PROGRAM7"
8 "PROGRAM8" "PROGRAM8"
9 "CALL RQ " "CALL RQ "
10 " BUSY " " BUSY "
11 "HURRY UP" "HURRY UP"
12 " HUNT " " HUNT "
13 " HOLD " " HOLD "
14 " CONF " " CONF "
15 " OPEN " " OPEN "
16 "OWN NUM " "OWN NUM "
17 " TO NUM " " TO NUM "
18 "FROM NUM" "FROM NUM"
19 " DELETE " "DELETE "
20 "REFUSED " "REFUSED "
21 "ACCEPTED" "ACCEPTED"
22 " DIAL " " DIAL "
23 "CALLBACK" "CALLBACK"
24 "CALL FWD" "CALL FWD"
25 "CALLRPLY" "CALLRPLY"
26 "SECRETRY" "SECRETRY"
27 "PRIVACY " "PRIVACY "
28 "MESSAGE " "MESSAGE "
29 " ENTER " " ENTER "
30 " DATA " " DATA "
31 " CODE " " CODE "
32 " NUMBER " " NUMBER "
33 "WAITING " "WAITING "
34 "TRANSFER" "TRANSFER"
35 " ABSENT " " ABSENT "
36 " DATE " " DATE "
37 " TIME " " TIME "
38 " EMPTY " " EMPTY "
39 "LASTCALL" "LASTCALL"
40 "ENABLED " "ENABLED "
41 "DISABLED" "DISABLED"
42 " QUEUE " " QUEUE "
43 "DISPLAY " "DISPLAY "
44 "SILENT " " SILENT "
SVT >
To select a different language, use the command SFTL (Set Feature Text Language). To select
German text:
SVT > sftl
Feature Text Language <1..4> : 3
SVT >

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 171

To list the new feature text, use the command LFT (List Feature Text)
SVT > lft
Feature Text id <1,-,37/*> : *
Text Default Current
id text text
================================
1 "PROGRAM1" "PROGRAM1"
2 "PROGRAM2" "PROGRAM2"
3 "PROGRAM3" "PROGRAM3"
4 "PROGRAM4" "PROGRAM4"
5 "PROGRAM5" "PROGRAM5"
6 "PROGRAM6" "PROGRAM6"
7 "PROGRAM7" "PROGRAM7"
8 "PROGRAM8" "PROGRAM8"
9 "CALL RQ " "ANRUFER "
10 " BUSY " "BESETZT "
11 "HURRY UP" "DRINGEND"
12 " HUNT " "UML ZU "
13 " HOLD " "WARTEN "
14 " CONF " "KONF "
15 " OPEN " "OPEN "
16 "OWN NUM " "EIGEN NR"
17 " TO NUM " "ZU NR "
18 "FROM NUM" "VON NR "
19 "DELETE " "AUS "
20 "REFUSED " "NICHT OK"
21 "ACCEPTED" "WHAL OK "
22 "DIAL " "WAEHLE "
23 "CALLBACK" "RUFEN "
24 "CALL FWD" "RUF-UML."
25 "CALLRPLY" "RUECKRUF"
26 "SECRETRY" "SEKRETER"
27 "PRIVACY " "GESPERRT"
28 "MESSAGE " "MESSAGE "
29 " ENTER " " ENTER "
30 " DATA " " DATA "
31 " CODE " " CODE "
32 " NUMBER " " NUMBER "
33 "WAITING " "WAITING "
34 "TRANSFER" " WEITER "
35 " ABSENT " "ABWESEND"
36 " DATE " " DATUM "
37 " TIME " " ZEIT "
38 " EMPTY " " LEER "
39 "LASTCALL" "RUF-MEMO"
40 "ENABLED " " AKTIV "
41 "DISABLED" "INAKTIV "
42 " NUMBER " " ANZAHL "
43 "DISPLAY " "DISPLAY "
44 " SILENT " "LEISERUF"

To change or edit the selected feature text, the command SFT (Set Feature Text) must be used.
With German language selected, if the text for the program channel no. 1 should be NDR (Nord
Deutsche Rundfunk) the programming will be:

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
172 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SVT > sft

Feature Text ID <1..27> : 1
Feature Text (Max 8 char) "PROGRAM1" : NDR
Insert Period in Feature Text ? <Y/N> : n

To list the updated language table, the command LFT is used. Text no. 1 is listed where the editing is
made:
SVT > lft
Feature Text id <1,-,27/*> : 1
Text Default Current
id text text
================================
1 "PROGRAM1" "NDR "

The text will be displayed in position 1, 2 and 3 in the display window (to the left). If it is required to
put the text in the centre of the display window, the text string entered must start and stop with
quotes, " ".
Between the quotes, there is room for 8 characters.
SVT > sft
Feature Text ID <1..27> : 1
Feature Text (Max 8 char) "NDR" : " NDR "
Insert Period in Feature Text ? <Y/N> : n

Listing the updated table:

SVT > lft
Feature Text id <1,-,27/*> : 1
Text Default Current
id text text
================================================
1 "PROGRAM1" " NDR "

If a text window requires a period (.), this can be entered the following way. The program distribution
channel no. 2 shall operate with the text SDR.1.
SVT > sft
Feature Text ID <1..27> : 2
Feature Text (Max 8 char) "PROGRAM2" : " SDR1 "
Insert Period in Feature Text ? <Y/N> : y
Insert Period at Position(s) <1,-,8/*> : 5

The period will not occupy any character position. The periods are inserted in separate positions
between the characters.
To list the edited feature text for program channels no. 1 and 2:
SVT > lft
Feature Text id <1,-,27/*> : 1,2
Text Default Current
id text text
================================================
1 "PROGRAM1" " NDR "
2 "PROGRAM2" " SDR.1 "

If a different language is required, i.e. Swedish, all the text in one of the existing languages must be
altered.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 173

60.2 CALLER IDENTIFICATION

As default, the station AA960 will display the station's call number, (CALL NO). The caller's call
number will also be displayed in the called station when a call is established.
To each call number, an 8 character text frame can be programmed, the call number's ID TEXT. If ID
TEXT is programmed, this will replace the CALL NO as default indication in the display.
To program ID TEXT use the command SCID (Set Caller IDentification).

In this example, call number 120 which belongs to John Smith, want to have the caller ID TEXT
JOHN S.

To program, use the command SCID.

SVT > scid
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 120
Call ID Text (Max 8 char) : "JOHN S "
Insert Period in Call ID Text ? <Y/N> : y
Insert Period at Position(s) <1,-,8/*> : 6

To list the ID TEXT for call number 120:

SVT > lcid
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 120
Call Call
Number ID Text
===========================
120 "JOHN S. "

To remove an ID Text, type back-slash (\) in the “Call ID Text” line.

60.3 RELAY FUNCTION

In the Display Station AA960, an optional relay can be installed. This relay can be programmed to
operate in 3 different modes:

Mode 1: The relay will operate if the CAS Relay Feature is enabled (YES is programmed).
See the command SCASN (Set CAS Number) or SCASRM (Set CAS Relay Mode) in
Chapter 35, Central Answering Service (CAS).
Mode 1 must be specified for the Calling station.

Mode 2: Door relay function. See description below.

Mode 3: The relay will operate if the CAS Relay Feature is enabled (YES is programmed).
See the command SCASN (Set CAS Number) or SCASRM (Set CAS Relay Mode) in
Chapter 35, Central Answering Service (CAS).
Mode 2 must be specified for the Receiving CAS operator station.

Mode U: No relay function

Door Function, Relay Mode 2.

The Door Function can operate the following ways:

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
174 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

A. LOCAL DOOR ACCESS.

The feature code to operate the relay in the INITIATING station is 952. To get access to this feature
the station must be programmed with the command SFA, Set Feature Access, feature code ID no. 52.
In addition an Access Code must be used. Use the command SAC (Set Access Code). The number of
digits in the access code is programmed with the command SACD (Set Access Code Digits).

In this example, a user wants to open the door at station no. 120 (relay in station no. 120 to operate).
The Access Code 1234.

To program relay mode 2 for call number 120:

SVT > srm
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 120
Relay Mode <1..2/U/D> : 2

To program the number of digits in the Access Code:

SVT > sacd
Number of Digits in Access Code <2..8/D> : 4

NOTE: If the number of digits in the access code is changed after any access codes are
programmed, all access codes will be undefined.

To program the Access Code:

SVT > sac
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 120
Access Code <1000..9999> : 1234

To program Feature Access

SVT > sfa
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 120
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 52
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

To open the door at station no. 120 (relay in station no. 120) dial the following: 952 1234

The length of the relay operation is programmed with the command SST (Set Subscriber Timers) the
timer no. 6. (See chapter 48, Timers).
The feature code 952 can be changed by the command SFC (Set Feature Code)

B. REMOTE DOOR ACCESS.

The feature code to operate the relay in the CALLED station is 953. To access the feature, the
command SFA (Set Feature Access) is used. The feature code ID is no. 53. In addition an Access
Code must be used if the access code is programmed to the called station. Use the command SAC
(Set Access Code).

In this example, a user wants to open a remote door by station no. 121 (relay in station no. 121 to
operate). The Access Code for this door is 5678. The user is calling from station 130.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 175

To program relay mode 2 for call number 121:

SVT > srm
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 121
Relay Mode <1..2/U/D> : 2

To program the Access Code for station 121:

SVT > sac
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 121
Access Code <1000,-,9999> : 5678

To program Feature Access for station 130:

SVT > sfa
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 130
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 53
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

From Duplex (when a connection is already established).

To open a remote door by station no. 121 (relay in station no. 121) dial the following string from
station 130: 953 5678

From Idle (before a connection is established).

To open a remote door at station no. 121 (relay in station no. 121) dial the following string from
station 130: 953 130 5678

The length of the relay operation is programmed with the command SST (Set Subscriber Timers) the
timer no. 6. (See chapter 47, Timers).
The feature code 953 can be changed by the command SFC (Set Feature Code)
C. PERSONAL DOOR ACCESS.

The feature code to operate the relay in any station is 954, but in this case the initiator must dial both
his own call number and his station's access code. To access the feature, the command SFA (Set
Feature Access) is used, programmed to the station equipped with relay to operate. The feature code
ID is no. 54. The central can now be programmed to give printout/status output and this way all
activity at any door can be logged

In this example, the user with call number 122 and Access Code 1010, want to open the door
controlled by relay in the station with call number 140.

To program relay mode 2 for call number 140:

SVT > srm
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 140
Relay Mode <1..2/U/D> : 2

To program the Access Code for station 122:

SVT > sac
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 122
Access Code <1000,-,9999> : 1010

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
176 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Give Feature Access to station with call no. 140:

SVT > sfa
Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 140
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> : 54
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

To open the door by station no. 140 (relay in station no. 140) dial the following code: 954 122 1010

The length of the relay operation is programmed with the command SST (Set Subscriber Timers) the
timer no. 6. (See chapter 48, Timers).
The feature code 954 can be changed by the command SFC (Set Feature Code)

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 177

60.4 MESSAGE DISPLAY

The Message Display feature gives a caller the possibility to cause a message string to be displayed
on a called AA960 station. Additional numeric information can be added to the messages nos. 6,7,8,9
and 0 by keying the appropriate keys, e.g. "CALL INT" . "12345".
The system operates with 10 different messages. These can be programmed with the commands
SMDT (Set Message Display Text) and listed with the command LMDT (List Message Display Text).

The language used is controlled by the command SFTL.

List the default messages:

SVT > lmdt

Message Display Text id <0,-,9/*> : *
Text Default text Current text
id Window #1 Window #2 Window #1 Window #2
========================================================
0 " CALL " "RECEPTN " " CALL " "RECEPTN "
1 " CALL " "SWBOARD " " CALL " "SWBOARD "
2 " CALL " " HOME " " CALL " " HOME "
3 "VISITOR " " LOBBY " "VISITOR " " LOBBY "
4 " " " " " " " "
5 " " " " " "
6 "CALL INT" "CALL INT"
7 "CALL TEL" "CALL TEL"
8 "MEETING " "MEETING "
9 " " " "

To edit the different messages, the command SMDT is used:

SVT > smdt
Message Text ID <0..9>: 0
Message Text Window #1 (Max 8 char) " CALL " : "CONTACT"
Insert Period in Message Text Window #1 ? <Y/N> : n
Message Text Window #2 (Max 8 char) "RECEPTN " : "RECEPTN"
Insert Period in Message Text Window #2 ? <Y/N> : n

List the new message display text table:

SVT > lmdt
Message Display Text id <0,-,9/*> : *
Text Default text Current text
id Window #1 Window #2 Window #1 Window #2
========================================================
0 " CALL " "RECEPTN " "CONTACT " "RECEPTN "
1 " CALL " "SWBOARD " " CALL " "SWBOARD "
2 " CALL " " HOME " " CALL " " HOME "
3 "VISITOR " " LOBBY " "VISITOR " " LOBBY "
4 " " " " " " " "
5 "CALL INT" "CALL INT"
6 "CALL TEL" "CALL TEL"
7 "MEETING " "MEETING "
8 " " " "
9 " " " "
Note:
If a period is entered into a text string, this will not be displayed in the list table.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
178 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

When a conversation is established to call number 160, the caller has the possibility to transmit one
of the messages in the Message Display Text table. The feature code to select a message is 957 and
then followed by the message number. To transmit the message "CONTACT" "RECEPTN",
dial 957 1.
Before the conversation is established, the caller can send the same message by dialling:
957 160 1.

In the called AA960 station, "MESSAGE" "WAITING" will be displayed. To read the message, dial the
feature code 958.

A maximum of 3 messages can be stored in each AA960 station. The message storing operates in
two different modes:

Mode 1: When 3 messages are stored in a station, no more messages can be sent to the
station.

Mode 2: When 3 messages are stored in a station, the next message (no. 4) will replace the first
stored message (no. 1).

The command to select the Message Display Mode is SMDM (Set Message Display Mode):

SVT > smdm

Message Display Mode (1) <1..2/D> : 1
SVT >

60.5 DISPLAY ADDITIONAL CALL DATA ON B-SUBSCRIBER

Some features have additional feature text. This is valid to the features CALL FORWARD and HUNT.
If this text should be displayed in the B-station when these features is used, these stations must be
programmed with the Call number privilege "display additional call data on B-subscriber", privilege
no. 28.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 179

61. FREE SEATING

This feature permits swapping of 2 stations data, without knowing the call number to the station from
where the swapping takes place.
The default feature code is 967.

Give feature access for free seating to stations no. 125 and 222.

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 125,222
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> :67
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

Example:
The following digits are dialled at station no.125
967222

All programmed data for stations 125 and 222 are now swapped.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
180 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

62. SILENT REQUEST

A silent request for call back, can be transmitted into the display of an AA960 station.

The feature code for this facility is 968.

Give feature access for silent request to stations no. 107

SVT > sfa

Call Number <100,-,999/*> : 107
Feature Access <10,-,69/*/D> :68
Operation <+/-/=> : +
SVT >

Use the command SDDD for station no.107, and program Direct Dialling 968100 for key no. 1 in table
no.1.

Use the command SST (Set Subscriber Timers) for station no.107 and set the following timers to ‘ 0 ‘.
Timer no.1 Warning tone.
Timer no.3 Direct dial activate.

A request call can now be made to station no 100 by pressing the no.1 button in station no.107.

Station no.107 is turned off after the request has been made, and the station is waiting for call back
from station no.100.

In station no.100 the following indications are present:

The LED will flash.
The text ‘SILENT’ is indicated in the stations display.
A continuously warbling tone is heard from the loudspeaker.

The call can be accepted in station no.100 by pressing the ‘ 0 ‘ button.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 181

63. STATUS I/O SPECIFICATIONS

63.1. SCOPE

This chapter describes version ‘I’ of the status I/O feature and replaces all previous revisions ‘A-H’.

63.2. INTRODUCTION

The purpose of the status I/O feature is to provide a two-way communications protocol between the
CB901 exchange and an external computer (e.g. PC, Workstation, minicomputer or programmable
Logic Controller).

The CB901 will typically send status information such as "A dialled B", and "A cancelled All Call" or
"stage 1 reset". Such status information can be subscriber or system specific.

The external computer can send commands to control standard CB901 features in the form of remote
dialling (simulated dialling), for example "make A listen to program distribution channel 6 volume 4".

63.3. AVAILABILITY

The status I/O feature shall be available in the following systems:

CB901-1
CB901-2
CB901-3
CB901-M (and double master)

63.4. BASIC DESIGN

Using the Service Terminal it shall be possible to program which events to log and where to log them.
The communications characteristics of the output drivers can also be customised (baud rate e.t.c.).

The status output and remote dialling are 2 independent features which must be controlled by the
external computer. For example the external computer can send a remote dial to couple A to B, but
will not know whether the call was established unless the appropriate status events are enabled.

The external computer needs to have a knowledge of the CB901 number series and feature codes in
order to execute remote dialling.

The status information from the CB901 is not time stamped, time stamping is a function of the
external computer.

Status I/O can generate significant traffic and degrade the performance of the CB901, so care must
be taken not to enable too much I/O.
It shall be possible to easily add events in future software releases, maintaining compatibility with
previous versions where possible.

The status I/O feature shall be very flexible in that it can be customised to meet and grow with a
particular customer's needs.

As default no events except serious errors will be logged on any device.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
182 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

63.4.1 EVENT TABLE

This table defines which events are to be logged, and where.

The table is stored in battery backup RAM.

Events are stage specific, that is to say, an event occurring in stage X can be logged differently from
the same event occurring in stage Y. Hence there is a unique event table in each stage.

Example:

Stage Event-ID Text Device-1 Device-2 Device-3

1 1 Callup PRT:1 PC:1 ---

1 2 DA-call PRT:* PC:1 ---
1 3 call-conn PC:1 PRT:M PRT:1

In the above example:

1) In stage 1, event 1, which is a Normal call-up, is output

to the printer in stage 1 and the PC attached to stage 1.

2) In stage 1, event 2, which is Direct access call, is sent

to the printer attached to all stages and the PC attached
to stage 1.

3) In stage 1, event 3, which is call connected, is output

to the PC attached to stage 1, the printer attached to
the Master and the printer attached to stage 1.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 183

63.4.1.1 PROGRAMMING THE EVENT TABLE

The Service Terminal can be used to carry out following:

1) Program which events to log.

2) Program where to log each event.
2 device types will be supported:
PC
PRINTER
The wild card character * can be used to specify all stages, giving the possibility for example
of logging an alarm on the printer attached to all stages.
3) Assign a string to an event for printer purposes only. The maximum length of such a string
shall be 20 characters.
4) Enable/disable status I/O for any subscriber.
5) List the above 1-4.

The command SSO, Set Status Output, defines where to log an event.

Example: Specify that Direct Press is to be logged on the printer attached to all stages and the PC
attached to the Master:

SVT > sso

Status Output Event ID <0..522> : 2
Stage <1..1> : 1
Output Device 1 <pC/pRinter/Undef> : R
Stage <1..1/*/M> : *
Output Device 2 <pC/pRinter/Undef> : c
Stage <1..1/*/M> : m
Output Device 3 <pC/pRinter/Undef> : u

SSO Set status output

2 Event 2 = direct press
1 Stage 1
r* Log on printer on all stages.
cm Log on PC attached to master.

The command SSE, Set Subscriber Event, must be used to enable/disable event I/O on a subscriber
basis. Note that this command is not used on system event where the command SSO suffices.

For example, enable output of events 1-3,5 (see table over page for translation) for subscribers 1002-
1005.

SVT > sse

Call Number <1000,-,9999/*> : 1002-1005
Status Event <0,-,70/*> : 1-3,5
Operation <+/-/=> : =

SSE Set Subscriber Enable

1002-1005 Subscribers
1-3,5 Enable only status I/O events 1,2,3,5

The command SSOT, Set Status Output Text, can be used to program printer texts for events. The
maximum length of an event text is 20 characters. Enclose the text string in "" if space are to be
included.
For example program the event 1 (default "call") to give the Norwegian for call "Anrop".

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
184 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SVT > ssot

Status Output Event ID <0..522> : 1
Stage <1..1> : 1
Status Output Text (Max 20 char) : “ANROP”

The command LSO List Status Output, can be used to list where the different status output events
will be routed for logging.

SVT > lso

Status Output Event ID <0,-,522/*> : 2
ID Default text Device 1 Device 2 Device 3
=======================================================
2 Direct Press Printer:* PC:M Undef:-

The command LSE List Subscriber Events, can be used to list the enabled/disabled subscriber
events.

SVT > lse

Call Number <1000,-,9999/*> : 1002
Status Event <0,-,70/*> : 1-3,5
Call Number ID Status Event Text Status
==========================================================
1002 1 ANROP Enabled
2 Direct Press Enabled
3 Call Connect-A Enabled
5 Busy Enabled

The command LSOT List Status Output Text can be used to list the programmed text for logging the
different events.

SVT > lsot

Status Output Event ID <0,-,522/*> : 1
Event ID Status Output Text
==============================
1 ANROP

The command GSE Get Subscriber Event can be used to search for enabled/disabled status events
related to the subscribers.

SVT > gse

Call Number <1000,-,9999/*> : 1002
Status Event <0,-,70/*> : 0-10
Status <Enabled/Disabled> : e
Call Number ID Enabled Status Event
===============================================
1002 1 ANROP
2 Direct Press
3 Call Connect-A
5 Busy

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 185

63.5. OUTPUT FROM CB901

This table describes all the output events which can be enabled and their parameters the general
message format is given in section 7.

Events in bold have not yet been implemented in TX5.7 but can be added at a later release.
63.5.1 SUBSCRIBER EVENTS

EVENT PARAMETERS MEANING

0 Dialling A digit A dials digit

1 Call-up A B A dials valid call number
2 DC-shift A key A makes a DC-shift
3 Call-connect-A A B A connect to B. (log call made by A)
4 Call connect-B B A B connect to A. (log call RX'd by B)
5 Busy A B B is busy
6 CAS local reset A CAS A performs CAS Local Reset
7 Hunt A B Call hunts to B
8 Privacy A B B is in privacy
9 CAS Logoff timer A cas_num [ID] Timer logs A off CAS group
10 Free-Seating A stage unit Subscribers new Number, stage and unit
11 Call-absent A B B is absent
12 Call disconnect A A B A cancelled call with X
13 Call time-outA A B Call auto-cancelled with timer on A-side
14 All-call A ac_num A dials all call
15 All-call-AX A A-side cancels all call with X
16 All-call-8 A A-side cancels all call with 8
17 All-call-BX B B-side cancels self with X
18 All-call-busy A All call busy
19 Group-call A gc_num A dials Group call
20 Group-call-AX A A-side cancels Group call with X
21 Group-call-8 A A-side cancels Group call with 8
22 Group call-BX B B-side cancels self with X

EVENT PARAMETERS MEANING

23 Group call-busy A Group call busy

24 CAS-call A cas_num Call to CAS
25 Remote Display Enabled A A enables Remote control of the display.
26 CAS-answer OP caller [ID] Operator accepts incoming call
27 Remote-Dial-refused A Remote Dial Refused
28 CAS Give Up A cas_num A cancel before CAS answers
29 CAS No Answer A cas_num A gets no answer from CAS
30 CAS logon A cas_num [ID] A logs on to CAS group
31 CAS logoff A cas_num [ID] A logs off CAS group
32 CAS-night-trans A cas_num hunt_num A dials night transfer
33 CAS-night-trans-X A cas_num A cancels night transfer
34 Conference-add A conf_member A adds conf member to conf
35 Conference-AX A A cancels last in conference
36 Conference-BX A conf_member B cancel
37 Conference-XX A A cancels the whole conference
38 Remote DSP dialling A digit A dials a digit
39 Direct-conf A dir_conf_num A dials direct conference
40 Direct-conf-X A A cancels direct conference
RING-MASTER INTERCOM
186 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

41 Program-ON A Chan vol A dials program. distribution

42 Call fwd-A A fwd_num Call forward type A
43 Call fwd-B A fwd_num Call forward type B
44 Call fwd-C A num fwd_num Call forward type C
45 Call fwd cancel A 999 on own station
46 Call fwd A BC Call is forwarded from B to C
47 Secretary Transfer A secr_num Secretary transfer
48 Secretary Transfer X A Cancel secretary transfer
49 Absent A msg_num A dials 97 + 0-8
50 Absent-X A A dials 97X
51 Paging-sent A B [ID] A pages B with Data ID
52 Pager alarm A pager_alarm [ID] Pager alarm 1,2
53 Remote Control A digits A dials remote control + digits
54 RD Complete A Remote dial completed
55 RD Error A Remote dial error
56 All Call Time-out A All Call timed out
57 Group Call Time-out A Group Call timed out
58 Program-OFF A Program. Distribution off
59 A DTMF transmission A B C digit A calls B, connected to C, digit is transmitted
from A to C
60 B DTMF transmission A B digit B calls A, digit is transmitted from A to B
61 Call Redirect A B C A redirect B to C.
62 Call Reconnect A B A reconnects to B.
63 Remote Display Disabled A A disables Remote control of the display.
64 Call Disconnect B B A B cancelled call with X
65 Call time-outB B A Call auto-cancelled with timer on B-side
66 CAS Night Transfer A CAS night-num A Night transfers CAS to night number

EVENT PARAMETERS MEANING

67 CAS Hunt A CAS hunt-num A receives hunt number from CAS

68 CAS Refused A CAS CAS call refused
69 Call Last callers A parameter A enables/disables Last Callers queue
70 Silent Request A BP A sends Silent Request to B
P = 1: Request received by B
P = 2: B is busy, but received request
P = 3: B did not receive the request
P = 4: B accepts the request

63.5.2 SYSTEM EVENTS

EVENT PARAMETERS MEANING

512 Im-status A stage unit Im-status line monitor absolute status

513 Im-chg A stage unit Im-status line monitor status change
514 Serial-port-chg stage port status serial port status change
515 Timeslot-in-use stage ts
516 Timeslot-release stage ts
517 No-timeslots stage
518 interlink-in-use stage il-card il
519 interlink-release stage il-card il
520 No-interlinks stage il-card
521 Stage-Restart stage
522 No CAS Operators CAS-number All operators has logged-off this group.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 187

63.6. INPUT TO CB901

EVENT PARAMETERS MEANING

1 Remote-dial A dial-string Remote Dial

2 RC-OK A Remote Control accepted
3 RC-refused A Remote Control refused
4 Display Message A msg-string Message to AA960
5 Display Msg Status A status-data Message Status to AA960
6 Display LED A led-data LED data to AA960
7 Display Tone A tone-data Tone data to AA960

63.7. ABBREVIATIONS

ABBREVIATION MEANING RANGE

A Caller, dialer Call Number

I Initiator Call Number
B Called station Call Number
C Connected station Call Number
OP CAS operator Call Number
ID Caller ID Max 8char.
unit Line equipment position 00-FF
ac_num All Call Number Call Number
gc_num Group Call Number Call Number
cas_num CAS access code Call Number
hunt_num CAS hunt number Call Number
Conf_member Conference member (B) Call Number
dir_conf_num Direct Conference Number 0-9
chan Program distribution channel 1-8
vol Program distribution volume 1-4
fwd_num Number forwarded to Call Number
secr_num Secretary number forwarded to Call Number
msg_num Absent message number 0-8
Im Line Monitor ---
Im_status Line Monitor status 0-1
il Interlink 1-8
ts Timeslot 1-30
il-card Interlink card 1-2
dial-string Remote dialling digits up to 23 digits (0-9,x,p,a,b,c)
msg-string Message Data 16 characters
status-data Message Status Data 8 bytes
led-data LED Data 3 bytes
tone-data Tone Data 4 bytes

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
188 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

63.8. PROTOCOL DETAILS

Wiring: 3-wire Rx, Tx, GND

Baud: 300-19200
Parity: odd, none, even
Stop bits: 1, 2, none
Bits/char: 7, 8

Handshake: XON/XOFF (when using printer ports only)

ACK/NAK - any other ports.

63.9. GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT

STX EVENT RS P1 RS P2

Pn ETX BCC

ACK

NAK

Control Characters

STX 02 CTRL-B Start of Text

RS 1E CTRL-^ Record Separator
ETX 03 CTRL-C End of Text
BCC 00-7F --- Block Check Character
(XOR checksum)
ACK 06 CTRL-F Acknowledge(message ok
NAK 15 CTRL-U Negative Acknowledge
(Message error).

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 189

Example :
Subscriber 123 calls subscriber 109 (output event 1)
CB901 sends the following message:

STX '1' RS '1' '2' '3' RS '1' '0' '9' ETX BCC

Example:
PC sends a remote dial command (input event 1) to couple subscriber 194 to program channel 4,
volume 3.

STX '1' RS '1' '9' '4' RS '9' '8' '4' '3' ETX BCC

Calculation of Block Check Character BCC

The BCC is the XOR checksum of all characters from STX to ETX (STX and ETX included). For
example the BCC of the characters STX / '1' / ETX is: 02 xor 31 xor 03 = 30.

0000 0010 02
XOR
0011 0001 31
0011 0011 = 33
XOR
0000 0011 03
0011 0000 = 30

Calculation of the BCC of the complete RD example above will be:

02 xor 31 xor 1E xor 31 xor 39 xor 34 xor 1E xor 39 xor 38 xor 34 xor 33 xor 03 = 3A

The complete data string for your PC will then look like this:

02 31 1e 39 34 1e 39 38 34 33 03 3a

The whole data field must be in one line with no space between the characters.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
190 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

63.10. REMOTE DIAL SVT COMMAND (RD)

In addition to the computer interface the service terminal can be used directly to execute a remote
dial.

SVT> RD <Caller> <remote-dial-string>

<caller> :Calling station

<remote-dial-string> :Max. 23 character string
:(0-9,A,B,C,P,X)
P :Pause as in direct dialling pause
X :Digit X

Example:

SVT> RD 123 109PPPX :3 second conversation between 123 and 109.

SVT> RD 123 9814 :123 shall listen to program distribution, channel 1 with volume 4.

SVT> RD 103 XXP500 :Cancel 103, wait 1 second then dial group call number 500.

When the RD is complete the service terminal prompt, SVT> is displayed.

The following error messages can be displayed before returning with the prompt.

ERROR: <caller> is not a call number

ERROR: No reply from catalogue
ERROR: Lost contact with stage N

63.11. Remote Control

Subscriber A can dial the remote control feature code 944 plus data digits + X. The data digits are
then sent to an external computer for further interpretation. The subscriber waits for an accept or
refused message from the external computer and gets the appropriate accept/refused tone. While
waiting for the reply the subscriber gets the busy tone.

63.12. Remote Display

A subscriber can dial the Remote Display feature code 960 to enable input of Display, LED and Tone
data from an external computer. The subscriber can disable the feature by pressing X.
The subscriber is BUSY in the intercom system when Remote Display is enabled.

A message will be sent to the external computer from the PC port of the processor card, and the
external PC can then control the information i the initiating AA960 station’s display.
The information in the display depends on the software in the external computer.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 191

Event 4 - Display Message

16 characters of 7 bits ASCII characters.
All characters from space to ~ (H’20 .. H’7E) can be sent, however, not alll characters can be
displayed in the current version of the Display Station. In general only capital letters ranging from A to
Z, digits ranging from 0 to 9 and the Space character should be sent to the Display Station. All
lowercase letters will be converted in the Display Station to their respective uppercase letter
counterpart.
Full Stop sign will be displayed to the right of the character if bit 7 in the ASCII character is set.

Event 5 - Display Message Status

8 bytes of 8 bits control codes.
This event is used to program a stations message display operating characteristics such as which
characters to flash, the flash duty cycle, the auto scroll enable/disable and which window to be first
displayed.

Byte 1: reserved, must be 0;

Byte 2: Display Mode Control

Defines which window to be first displayed.

bit 0,1: Message Enter Window, 1 == window 1, 2 == window 2

2 == window 3, 0 == window 4
bit 2-7: reserved, must be 0.

Byte 3: Display Scroll Mode Control

Enables or disables the message auto scroll feature, sets the auto scroll speed and enables
or disables the auto scroll feature which includes a blank window to separate the last and the
first message display window.

bit 0,1: Auto Scroll Speed, 0..3

bit 2: Auto Scroll Enable, 1 == enable, 0 == Disable
bit 3: Auto Scroll Blank Last Window, 1 == Blank, 0 == not Blank.
bit4-7: Reserved, must be 0.

Byte 4: Display Flash Duration Control

Defines the flash character duty cycle (on and off duration).

bit 0-3: Flash Duration On, 0..15.

bit 4-7: Flash Duration Off, 0..15.

Byte 5: Display Window 1 Flash Control

Defines which, if any, of the 8 characters in message window 1 that will flash when window 1
are displayed.
bit 0: Flash Character 1, 1 == flash, 0 == not flash.
:
bit 7: Flash Character 8, 1 == flash, 0 == not flash.

Byte 6: Display Window 2 Flash Control

Defines which, if any, of the 8 characters in message window 2 that will flash when window 2
are displayed.
bit 0: Flash Character 9, 1 == flash, 0 == not flash.
:
bit 7: Flash Character 16, 1 == flash, 0 == not flash.

Byte 7: Display Window 3 Flash Control

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
192 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Defines which, if any, of the 8 characters in message window 3 that will flash when window 3
are displayed.

bit 0: Flash Character 17, 1 == flash, 0 == not flash.

:
bit 7: Flash Character 25, 1 == flash, 0 == not flash.

Byte 8: Display Window 4 Flash Control

Defines which, if any, of the 8 characters in message window 4 that will flash when window 4
are displayed.

bit 0: Flash Character 26, 1 == flash, 0 == not flash.

:
bit 7: Flash Character 32, 1 == flash, 0 == not flash.

Event 6 - Display LED

3 bytes of 8 bits control codes.
This event is used to program any static or two-step repetitively LED flashing combination. The event
has three parameters used to specify the detailed action. The wanted action is initiated once the
event and the parameters are received by the station.

Byte 1: LED Mode and Color Control

This parameter defines the LED color in both flash and static mode and defines if this is a
flash or static LED action.

bit 0,1: LED Static and End Color. 0..3

bit 2: LED Flash or Static Mode, 1 == Flash, 0 == Static.
bit 3: LED Station On or Off Mode. must be 0.
bit 4,5: LED Flash Duration 1 Color. 0..3
bit 6,7: LED Flash Duration 2 Color. 0..3

Byte 2: LED Flash Duration Control.

This parameter defines the LED flash duration times if flash mode is selected.

bit 0-3: LED Flash Duration 1, 0..15.

bit 4-7: LED Flash Duration 2, 0..15.
Byte 3: LED Flash Repeat Control.
This parameter defines the number of times the LED will flash if flash mode is selected.

bit 0-3: Number of flashes, 1..15, 0 == indefinitely.

bit 4-7: Reserved, must be 0.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 193

LED Colour Table

Number Color
0 Blank
1 Red
2 Green
3 Orange

LED Flash Duration Table

Duration Number Duration (ms)
0 3770
1 100
2 200
3 300
4 400
5 500
6 600
7 700
8 800
9 900
10 1000
11 1250
12 1500
13 2000
14 2500
15 3000

Event 7 - Display-Tone
4 bytes of 8 bits control codes.
This event is used to program any single or dual tone output or to stop any current tone output. This
event has four parameters to specify in detail the tone(s) (frequency) and the duration(s). The tone
output is initiated once the event and the parameters are received by the station.

Byte 1: Tone Mode and Repeat Control

This parameter is used to select the tone mode, which can be either single or dual mode, the
number of times the dual tone sequence will be repeated and if the tones is to be started or
terminated.

bit 0-3: Dual Tone Repeat, 1..15, 0 == indefinitely.

bit 4-5: reserved, must be 0.
bit 6: Tone Mode Select, 1 == Dual Tone,0 == Singel Tone.
bit 7: Tone Start Select, 1 == Start Tone,0 == Terminate Tone.

Byte 2: Tone Select Control

This parameter defines the tones to be output for both single and dual tone modes. The single
tone is set with Tone 1 Select bits, while the dual tone tones is set with both the Tone 1 Select
and the Tone 2 Select bits.

bit 0-3: Tone 1 Select, 1..15, 0 == no tone.

bit 4-7: Tone 2 Select, 1..15, 0 == no tone.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
194 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Byte 3: Tone Duration Control

This parameter defines the tone duration for both single and dual tone modes. The single
tone duration is set with Tone 1 Duration bits, while the dual tone tones is set with both the
Tone 1 Duration and the Tone 2 Duration bits.

bit 0-3: Tone 1 Duration, 1..15, 0 == see Tone Duration Table.

bit 4-7: Tone 2 Duration, 1..15.

Byte 4: Dual Tone Intermittent Time Control

This parameter defines the intermittent time between the dual tones.
bit 0-3: Intermittent Time 1, 0..15.
bit 4-7: Intermittent Time 2, 0..15.

Tone Duration Table

Duration Number Duration (ms)
0 Note 1
1 100
2 200
3 300
4 400
5 500
6 600
7 700
8 800
9 900
10 1000
11 1250
12 1500
13 2000
14 2500
15 3000

Note 1: Byte 3, Single Tone Mode: 0 == indefinitely

Byte 3, Dual Tone Mode: 0 == 3770 ms.
Byte 4, Dual Tone Mode: 0 == 0 ms.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 195

Tone Select Table

Tone Number Frequency (Hz)
0 0
1 366
2 440
3 509
4 582
5 651
6 721
7 787
8 860
9 928
10 997
11 1065
12 1143
13 1217
14 1284
15 1399

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
196 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

64. TRACE ROUTINES

NOTE:
The lab have included a number of trace routines in the standard RM software. These routines are
intended for use in the lab for debugging purposes.
The necessary information about the different traces will be supplied from our lab in each case.
The local Ring-Master engineer will then be requested to run the specified test, save the result on a
diskette and send the information to Norway.

In this chapter we have included a couple of traces which can be useful in the field.
They are mostly intended for a go / no-go test.

Please remember that all traces may interrupt the normal operation of the central.

64.1 ROUTINES FOR TRACING THE OUTPUT FOR SVIM, PAGER, PC AND
DISPLAY, AND DISPLAY THE RESULT ON THE SVT PORT.

Depending on what you want to trace, use the normal SVT command to specify.
spn : Set pager number
sso : Set status output
sse : Set status enable

First use the command sd to set the CB901 driver, and then the command stty to specify the data on
the port.

Example 1:
We will specify a trace of the PAGER output.

sdps (set driver) :Specify which function you want to trace.

SVT>sdps
Driver <Svim/Pager/pC/Dsp> :p
Enable SVT O/P ? <Y/N> :y
SVT>

sddo ( set debug driver output) :Specify which trace you want.

SVT>sddo
Driver Debug Output <1,-,8/* : *
Operation <+/-/=> : = :All traces are enabled
SVT>

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 197

lddo (list driver output) :List which trace is enabled

SVT>lddo
1 DBG_OUT_MSG : Enabled
2 DBG_OUT_ACK_NACK : Enabled
3 DBG_IN_ERROR : Enabled
4 DBG_IN_IP : Enabled
5 DBG_IN_CHR : Enabled
6 DBG_IN_STX : Enabled
7 DBG_IN_MSG : Enabled
8 DBG_IN_CONTROL : Enabled
SVT>

SVT>log

Make a page call.

The specified communication data between the Pager and CB901 will be displayed.

Example 2:

Enable only trace no. 1.

sddo ( set debug driver output) :Specify which trace you want.

SVT>sddo
Driver Debug Output <1,-,8/* : 1
Operation <+/-/=> := :Only trace 1 is enabled
SVT>

lddo (list debug driver output) :List which trace is enabled

SVT>lddo
1 DBG_OUT_MSG : Enabled
2 DBG_OUT_ACK_NACK : Disabled
3 DBG_IN_ERROR : Disabled
4 DBG_IN_IP : Disabled
5 DBG_IN_CHR : Disabled
6 DBG_IN_STX : Disabled
7 DBG_IN_MSG : Disabled
8 DBG_IN_CONTROL : Disabled

The specified communication data between the Pager and CB901 will be displayed.

Stop the tracing :

Press: ESC.
Log in: tridex

SVT>sddo
Driver Debug Output <1,-,8/* : *
Operation <+/-/=> : - :All traces are disabled
SVT>

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
198 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SVT>sdps
Driver <Svim/Pager/pC/Dsp> :p
Enable SVT O/P ? <Y/N> :n
SVT>

64.2 Check subscriber activities:

The main purpose of the following test is to check the activities for the subscribers.
This is specially useful when testing the central via modem, where you cannot see the activities
indicated by the LED’s in the central.

Example 1:

SVT > lid

Individ Number <1,-,265/*> : *
Don’t List Individ Data in FSM-state <1..899/U> : 1
Idivid Call Number Line equip Stage State
SVT >

In the above test we have asked for a listing of all stations which are not in idle state. This means that
the station is dialling, in conversation, e.t.c.
Idle is identified by state ‘1’, and by typing 1 we have told the system to list all states except 1.
The above listing indicates that all stations in the system are idle.

Example 2:

SVT > lid

Individ Number <1,-,265/*> : *
Don’t List Individ Data in FSM-state <1..899/U> : 1
Idivid Call Number Line equip Stage State
1 100 $00 1 215
2 101 $01 1 45

The above listing indicates that all stations in the system are idle, except stations with call numbers
100 and 101 .

Station number 100 is in state 215. This means B Duplex.

Station number 101 is in state 45. This means A Duplex.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 199

65. CONFIGURATION OF PROCOMM PLUS / BACKUP OF DATA

65.1 Introduction:
By using a Personal Computer we can take backup of all data programmed into the processor card
NFE1683 and save it on a diskette.
Different communication programmes may be used for this purpose. We have decided to use
PROCOMM PLUS (PcPlus) from DataStorm Technologies Inc. USA.
The following information will describe the set-up for programming in the SVT programming format.
PcPlus should be available in most countries and we suggest that you buy the programme locally.
Both the set-up for PcPlus version 1 and 2 will be listed.

65.2 PCPLUS SETUP:

Install the programme in your PC and run it by typing PCPLUS.
The programme will start directly in the terminal mode.
Connect the cable between the COM1 port of the PC, and the 9 pins D-connector on the front of the
NFE1683 processor card.

A. Configure the COM1 port in your PC.

1: Press ALT-P.
2: Select the following data from the menu: 9600,N,8,1,COM1.
3: Press ALT-S to save the configuration.
You are now back in terminal mode.

Press ESC , and type the password when requested from the SVT programme.
The central can now be programmed directly, operating the PC as a normal terminal.

B. Protocol setting for data backup,

(PcPlus Version 1).
1: Press ALT-S.
2: Select TERMINAL OPTIONS from the menu.
Press Enter.
3: Select GENERAL OPTIONS from the menu.
Press Enter.
4: Set SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL (XON/XOFF) to ON by toggling C.
Press Enter.
5: Set FULL DUPLEX. Press Enter
6: Press ESC twice.
7: Select ASCII TRANSFER OPTIONS from the menu.
Press Enter.
8: Set the options according to the following:
A-NO, B-YES, C-YES, D-0, E-0, F-62, G-NONE, H-STRIP,I-NONE, J-NONE, K=NO.
Press Enter.
9: Press ESC.
10: Select SAVE SETUP OPTIONS from the menu.
Press Enter.
11: Press ESC.

You are now back in Terminal Mode.

The above set-up procedure is only necessary the first time you start PCPLUS.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
200 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

C. Protocol setting for data backup,

(PcPlus Version 2).
1: Press ALT-S.

2: Select TERMINAL OPTIONS from the menu.

Press Enter..
3: Set SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL (XON/XOFF) to ON by toggling C.
Press Enter.
4: Set FULL DUPLEX
Press Enter
5: Press ESC.
6: Select PROTOCOL OPTIONS from the menu.
Press Enter.
7: Select ASCII PROTOCOL OPTIONS from the menu.
Press Enter.
8: Set the options according to the following:
A-NO, B-YES, C-YES, D-0, E-0, F-62, G-NO, H-10, I-NONE, J-STRIP,K-NONE, L-NONE.
Press Enter.
9: Press ESC twice
10: Select SAVE SETUP OPTIONS from the menu.
Press Enter.
11: Press ESC.

You are now back in Terminal Mode.

The above set-up procedure is only necessary the first time you start PCPLUS

65.3 BACKUP
You can now take backup of all data in the central, DOWNLOAD onto a diskette.
The data can later on be loaded back into the central, UPLOAD from the diskette.
We have 2 different procedures for programming the central, and keeping backup of programmed
data.
A: The PC is connected to the Ring-Master
central's CPU card NFE1683:
We can take backup of all data in the central, both the individual programme and the standard
(default) programme.
For this purpose we have 3 commands.
1:BACKUP. Takes backup of all data in the central.
2:BACKSYS.Takes backup of all system data only.
3:BACKSUB.Takes backup of all subscriber data only, one stage at a time.

Download procedure:
(Receiving data from the NFE 1683 card).

1:When PROCOM PLUS is in TERMINAL mode type BACKUP, BACKSYS or BACKSUB. (Do NOT
press Enter now).
2:Press PgDn.
3:Select 4 (ASCII format) from the displayed menu.
(PcPlus Version 2, Select A).
Press Enter.
4:The PC will ask you to name a file into which you want to DOWNLOAD the data from the central.
(You may specify a directory and/or a drive, e.g. a diskette in drive a:\).
5:Press ENTER.
6:Press ENTER.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL SEPTEMBER 1997 201

7: The System will respond:

"Include Default Subscriber Data?" <Y/N>
Select N.
Select Y only if you have the intention to edit the back-up file.

8:The data will scroll over the screen during DOWNLOAD.

9:Press ESC to close the file when the SVT prompt is displayed. The downloading is then finished.
NOTE: In PROCOM you can also specify a default path for downloading files.
Press ALT-S.
Select FILE/PATH OPTION.
Type Enter.
Select the drive and file name for downloading.
Type Enter.
Type ESC twice and answer Yes to the changes.

To reprogram/change the system data you can now use your word processor software to open and
edit the downloaded file. Remember to save the edited files in ASCII format (not formatted for your
word processor software). PROCOM has a built in text editor, PCEDIT. It can maximum edit 500
lines. (PcPlus Version 2, 5000 lines).
Press ALT-A.
Press Enter.
Type the file to edit. Follow the instruction on the screen.

Upload procedure:
(Sending data to the NFE 1683 card).

1:When PROCOM PLUS is in TERMINAL mode, press PgUp.

2:Select 4 (ASCII format) from the displayed menu.

(PcPlus Version 2, Select A).
Press Enter

3:The PC will ask you to type the name of the file you want to UPLOAD.
Press Enter.

4:The UPLOAD is finished when the SVT prompt is displayed and the PC signals with bleeps.
B: The PC is NOT connected to the Ring-Master central's CPU card NFE1683:
You have the opportunity to sit down undisturbed in your office, workshop or any other convenient
location remote from the central, and type the complete program into your PC. When the central
installation is ready, you can bring your PC to the customer and load the data into the Central
Processor in a few seconds, or minutes.

PROCEDURE:

1:Use your Word Processor and type the complete program in the IN-LINE format.

2:Save the typed data as an ASCII file.

NO FORMATTING.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM
202 SEPTEMBER 1997 SVT PROGRAMMING MANUAL

3:Connect the PC to the Central and load the typed data into the Central Processor, following the
UPLOAD procedure as explained earlier.
When using the BACKUP command we will save both standard (default) and special programmed
data. This will require approximately 50 Kb of storage space on the diskette for each 240 subscribers.
Depending on the clock speed of the PC, the UPLOAD will take anything from 10 min to one hour per
each 240 no. central.
It is therefore recommended to use your Word Processor. That way you will only UPLOAD the data
you have changed, thereby saving time. However, if you are changing numbers from the stations, this
procedure cannot be used. Then you must use the BACKUP command.

RING-MASTER INTERCOM